Sony Ericsson Cell Phone P908 User Manual

This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
P908  
User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Contents  
Entering text..................................................................... 31  
P908 locks........................................................................ 40  
OVERVIEW  
Introduction................................................................. 8  
Phone.......................................................................... 43  
Call handling with the Flip closed ................................... 43  
Call handling with the Flip open...................................... 46  
Handling two or more calls.............................................. 49  
Call list and call log ......................................................... 50  
Hints and smart functions ................................................ 51  
Preferences....................................................................... 55  
Getting to know your P908......................................... 9  
P908 package...................................................................... 9  
P908 overview .................................................................. 10  
SIM card ........................................................................... 11  
Battery .............................................................................. 11  
Care instructions............................................................... 12  
First time start-up.............................................................. 13  
Turning your P908 on and off .......................................... 13  
Importing phone book entries........................................... 13  
Operational modes............................................................ 14  
Flip closed mode .............................................................. 15  
Flip open mode ................................................................. 16  
Flip removed..................................................................... 16  
Screen areas ...................................................................... 17  
Jog Dial ............................................................................ 18  
Keypad functions ............................................................. 19  
Indicators and status bar icons.......................................... 20  
Memory Stick Duo™ ....................................................... 21  
Connecting the accessories............................................... 23  
Services............................................................................. 24  
Applications - overview.................................................... 24  
General functions.............................................................. 27  
MEDIA  
CommuniCorder....................................................... 61  
Recording video clips ...................................................... 61  
Taking pictures ................................................................ 63  
Camera settings................................................................ 64  
Pictures and Image editor........................................ 65  
Pictures ............................................................................ 65  
Image editor ..................................................................... 67  
Video .......................................................................... 69  
Video clips ....................................................................... 69  
Streaming......................................................................... 71  
Preferences....................................................................... 72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Music player............................................................... 73  
Playing sound files............................................................ 73  
Managing sound files........................................................ 74  
Calendar .................................................................. 107  
Creating calendar entries................................................ 107  
Managing calendar entries ............................................. 108  
Sending and receiving calendar entries.......................... 109  
Preferences..................................................................... 109  
Internet....................................................................... 77  
Using the browser view .................................................... 78  
Preferences........................................................................ 83  
Tasks ........................................................................ 110  
Creating task entries....................................................... 110  
Managing task entries .................................................... 111  
Moving task entries........................................................ 111  
Sending and receiving task entries................................. 112  
Preferences..................................................................... 112  
Games ......................................................................... 85  
Chess................................................................................. 85  
Solitaire............................................................................. 85  
BUSINESS  
Jotter ........................................................................ 113  
Creating and editing notes ............................................. 113  
Drawing pictures............................................................ 114  
Managing notes.............................................................. 114  
Sending and receiving notes .......................................... 114  
Messages..................................................................... 87  
Folders in Messages.......................................................... 88  
The accounts in Messages ................................................ 89  
Handling text messages .................................................... 89  
Handling multimedia messages ........................................ 90  
Handling e-mails............................................................... 93  
More about messaging...................................................... 96  
TOOLS  
Sound recorder........................................................ 115  
Making sound recordings............................................... 115  
Using sound recordings as ring signals.......................... 116  
Sending sound recordings.............................................. 116  
Contacts...................................................................... 99  
Using Contacts with the Flip closed................................. 99  
Using Contacts with the Flip open.................................. 101  
Creating and editing contacts.......................................... 102  
Managing contacts.......................................................... 104  
Making an owner card .................................................... 105  
Preferences...................................................................... 105  
Calculator ................................................................ 117  
Time.......................................................................... 118  
Setting time and date...................................................... 118  
Specifying workdays...................................................... 119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Setting locations ............................................................. 119  
Setting number formats .................................................. 119  
Setting alarms ................................................................. 120  
Connection via Infrared port.......................................... 136  
Connection via Bluetooth wireless technology ............. 136  
Synchronization and backup ................................. 140  
Local synchronization.................................................... 140  
Remote synchronization ................................................ 141  
Backing up data ............................................................. 142  
Restoring data ................................................................ 143  
Common viewer functions.............................................. 121  
Viewing Word documents.............................................. 122  
Viewing Excel spreadsheets ........................................... 122  
Viewing PowerPoint presentations and PDFs................ 123  
SETTINGS  
File manager ............................................................ 124  
Online services......................................................... 126  
Personalizing your P908......................................... 144  
Themes........................................................................... 144  
Changing your application shortcuts ............................. 144  
Setting a background picture ......................................... 144  
Setting a screen saver..................................................... 144  
Adding images to your Contacts.................................... 145  
Ring signals.................................................................... 145  
Alarm tones and sound notification............................... 146  
Dictionary................................................................. 127  
Searching for a word....................................................... 127  
History record and bookmarks ....................................... 128  
Dictionary database ........................................................ 129  
Settings ........................................................................... 129  
ADVANCED FUNCTIONS  
Control panel........................................................... 147  
PC Suite and multimedia for P908 ........................ 130  
PC Suite for P908 ........................................................... 130  
Multimedia for P908....................................................... 131  
The Device tab  
Application shortcuts ..................................................... 147  
Display........................................................................... 147  
Flight mode.................................................................... 148  
International................................................................... 149  
Locks.............................................................................. 149  
Sounds and alerts ........................................................... 149  
Text input....................................................................... 151  
Installing applications............................................. 132  
Installing applications on your P908 .............................. 132  
Removing applications from your P908......................... 134  
Connecting to other devices.................................... 135  
Connection via SyncStation............................................ 135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Themes............................................................................ 151  
Time & date .................................................................... 151  
User greeting................................................................... 152  
Using your P908 as a modem ........................................ 174  
GPRS - connection information..................................... 176  
REFERENCE  
The Connections tab  
Troubleshooting ...................................................... 178  
Bluetooth......................................................................... 153  
Cable............................................................................... 154  
GSM Networks............................................................... 154  
Infrared ........................................................................... 155  
Internet accounts............................................................. 155  
Messaging accounts........................................................ 160  
WAP accounts ................................................................ 164  
Guidelines for safe and efficient use...................... 182  
Limited warranty............................................................ 184  
FCC Statement............................................................... 185  
Environmental information............................................ 185  
Declaration of Conformity............................................. 185  
Terms and definitions............................................. 186  
Technical data ......................................................... 194  
Index......................................................................... 197  
The Other tab  
Certificate manager......................................................... 165  
Flip removed................................................................... 166  
Format disk..................................................................... 166  
IP Security manager........................................................ 167  
Language selection ......................................................... 167  
Master reset..................................................................... 167  
Secure tokens.................................................................. 167  
Storage manager ............................................................. 168  
WIM PIN settings........................................................... 169  
Getting started with Internet and Messages......... 171  
Introduction..................................................................... 171  
Automatically set up service provider and messaging ... 172  
Manually set up service provider.................................... 172  
Manually set up Messages.............................................. 173  
Setting up WAP accounts ............................................... 174  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Sony Ericsson P908  
2. Export Regulations: Software, including technical data, is subject to U.S. export  
control laws, including the U.S. Export Administration Act and its associated  
regulations, and may be subject to export or import regulations in other countries.  
The Customer agrees to comply strictly with all such regulations and  
acknowledges that it has the responsibility to obtain licenses to export, re-export,  
or import Software. Software may not be downloaded, or otherwise exported or re-  
exported (i) into, or to a national or resident of, Cuba, Iraq, Iran, North Korea,  
Libya, Sudan, Syria (as such listing may be revised from time to time) or any  
country/region to which the U.S. has embargoed goods; or (ii) to anyone on the  
U.S. Treasury Department's list of Specially Designated Nations or the U.S.  
Commerce Department's Table of Denial Orders.  
User Guide  
Second edition (March 2004)  
This User Guide is published by Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications AB,  
without any warranty. Improvements and changes to this User Guide necessitated  
by typographical errors, inaccuracies of current information, or improvements to  
programs and/or equipment, may be made by Sony Ericsson Mobile  
Communications AB at any time and without notice. Such changes will, however,  
be incorporated into new editions of this User Guide.  
©Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications AB, 2003. All rights reserved.  
Publication number: EN/LZT 108 6638 R1B  
The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any  
use of such marks by Sony Ericsson is under license.  
3. Restricted Rights: Use, duplication or disclosure by the United States  
government is subject to the restrictions as set forth in the Rights in Technical Data  
and Computer Software Clauses in DFARS 252.227-7013(c) (1) (ii) and FAR  
52.227-19(c) (2) as applicable.  
This product contain QuickView Plus and Outside In which are © 1992-2002  
Stellent Chicago Inc. All rights reserved.  
Any rights not expressly granted herein are reserved.  
QuickView Plus and Outside In are trademarks or registered trademarks of Stellent  
Chicago Inc.  
Symbian and all Symbian-based marks and logos are trademarks of Symbian  
Limited.  
Memory Stick Duois a trademark of Sony, its parent and/or its affiliates.  
Beatnik is a trademark of Beatnik, Inc.  
Note Some of the services in this User Guide are not supported by all networks.  
This also applies to the GSM International Emergency Number 112. Please contact  
your network operator or service provider if you are in doubt whether you can use  
a particular service or not.  
Important  
Javaand all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered  
trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries/regions.  
Other product and company names mentioned herein may be the trademarks of  
their respective owners.  
Copyright © SyncML initiative Ltd. (1999-2002). All rights reserved.  
Portions of software © PacketVideo Corporation (USA) 1999, 2002. PacketVideo,  
pvPlayer and the PacketVideo logo are trademarks of PacketVideo Corporation.  
All rights reserved.  
This product contains software copyright © Beatnik, Inc.  
1996-2002.  
End-user license agreement for SunJavaJ2ME:  
1. Restrictions: Software is confidential copyrighted information of Sun and title to  
all copies is retained by Sun and/or its licensors. Customer shall not modify,  
decompile, disassemble, decrypt, extract, or otherwise reverse engineer Software.  
Software may not be leased, assigned, or sublicensed, in whole or in part.  
Your mobile phone has the capability to load, store and forward additional content,  
e.g. ring tone melodies. The use of such content may be restricted or prohibited by  
rights of third parties, including but not limited to restriction under applicable  
copyright laws. You, and not Sony Ericsson, are entirely responsible for additional  
content that you download to or forward from your mobile phone. Prior to your use  
of any additional content, please verify that your intended use is properly licensed  
or is otherwise authorised. Sony Ericsson does not guarantee the accuracy,  
integrity or quality of any additional content or any other third-party content.  
Under no circumstances will Sony Ericsson be liable in any way for your improper  
use of additional content or other third party content.  
Note Sony Ericsson advices users to backup their personal data information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
OVERVIEW  
Introduction  
For ease of reference the ‘Getting to know your P908’ chapter  
gives a quick overview of the main functions of the phone,  
shortcuts and general information.  
The P908 can be used as a corporate phone with Ericsson  
MD110 and Business Phone exchanges.  
®
®
The P908 also contains an organizer,  
which includes contacts, a calendar,  
notes and e-mail, all of which can be  
quickly and efficiently synchronized  
with a PC. The e-mail application  
supports attachments. Viewers let you  
read documents in various formats  
such as Microsoft® Word, Excel and  
PowerPoint.  
Your P908 combines advanced business and entertainment  
features in one intuitive device.  
Its integrated camera lets you take pictures and record video  
wherever you are and use them in a wide range of applications.  
The pictures can be used in the Picture Phone Book, where they  
can be used to identify callers.  
MMS (Multimedia Messaging Service) allows you to send and  
receive messages that include pictures, sound, text and voice  
notes.  
The complete P908 documentation  
consists of the following parts:  
The P908 features advanced entertainment functionality that  
offers high quality MP3 music and widescreen format video  
clips and 3D games. New content can be downloaded quickly  
and easily from Internet sites or transferred to the phone via  
BluetoothWireless Technology, an infrared port or a cable.  
Extra memory is available through Memory Stick Duo, which  
also serves as a convenient way to exchange content and  
applications such as Javagames.  
Quick Guide  
User Guide  
Instruction for removing the Flip  
Help texts in the P908  
Complementary information on the Internet, refer to  
www.SonyEricsson.com.cn  
Information on the PC Suite for P908 CD  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
Introduction  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Getting to know your P908  
P908 package  
A
B
C
D
E
F
P908 with stylus  
Battery  
L
Travel charger  
SyncStation  
A
Stereo headset  
P908  
Protective bag and strap  
Extra stylus  
G
H
J
Cover and tool set - Flip replacement  
Memory Stick Duo™  
Memory Stick Duo adapter  
User documentation package  
2 CDs, PC Suite for P908 and Multimedia for P908  
F
K
L
D
K
M
J
M
Note The design of the charger will differ depending on the  
market.  
H
B
Note If your package does not include all the listed items above,  
please contact your retailer.  
E
Note Before you can use your P908 you need to insert the SIM  
card, and insert and charge the battery. Always detach the  
charger before you insert or remove the SIM card.  
G
C
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting to know your P908  
9
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
P908 overview  
A
F
B
D
A
C
D
E
G
F
B
G
H
I
C
E
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
Stylus  
A
B
C
D
E
F
Indicator light for Bluetooth wireless technology (blue)  
Screen  
External antenna connector  
CommuniCorder  
Flip (in open position)  
Battery compartment  
Connector for accessories and charger  
Connector for stereo headset  
Jog Dial  
Indicator light for network and battery (green/red)  
CommuniCorder activation and shutter release  
Internet button for activation of the browser  
Slot for Sony Memory Stick Duo  
G
Infrared port  
On/Off button  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10  
Getting to know your P908  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
SIM card  
Battery  
When you register as a subscriber  
with a network operator, you receive a  
SIM (Subscriber Identity Module)  
card. The SIM card contains a  
Before you use your P908 for the first time, charge the battery  
provided for at least 4 hours. Use the supplied charger. See  
‘Charging the battery’ on page 12.  
computer chip that keeps track of your  
phone number, the services included  
in your subscription and your phone  
book information, among other things.  
Insertion and removal  
To insert the battery  
1. Ensure that the Flip is closed.  
A PIN (Personal Identity Number)  
code is supplied with the SIM card  
from your operator and must be  
2. Remove the battery cover by  
sliding it downwards.  
3. Place the battery in the  
battery compartment and  
close the cover.  
entered when switching on your P908.  
Open the battery cover and insert the  
SIM card as shown in the picture.  
To remove the battery  
Some subscriptions are limited to call  
1. Ensure that your P908 is  
turned off.  
only predefined numbers, so-called Fixed Dialling Numbers  
(FDN). To avoid problems when travelling abroad, these  
predefined numbers should be defined as international numbers  
starting with +, for example +4613244500. In order to speed up  
calling while at home, the same numbers can also be added in  
the national number format, for example 013244500.  
Note It is important that you always turn off your P908 before  
removing the battery. Failure to do so can result in loss of  
information.  
2. Remove the battery cover by sliding it downwards.  
For more information. see ‘Copying contacts to and from the  
SIM card’ on page 105.  
3. Use your fingernail at the lower left-hand edge of the battery  
to gently lift the lower edge of the battery outwards.  
4. Take out the battery.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting to know your P908  
11  
           
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Tip You can also use other battery chargers that have been  
supplied with other Sony Ericsson mobile phones using the same  
connector plug, for example, T68i or T300.  
Charging the battery  
When the battery needs to be charged, a beep is heard. The  
indicator light (on the top of your P908) flashes red and a  
battery low message appears on the screen.  
Note When the battery is completely discharged, or new, it may  
take up to 30 minutes before the battery charging icon appears  
on the screen.  
The battery can be charged whenever you want. The P908  
performance is not affected. However, using your P908 while  
charging increases the charging time.  
4. Wait approximately 4 hours or until the battery meter on the  
screen is full and the indicator on the top of the P908 shows a  
steady green light.  
To charge the battery  
The P908 can be charged either when it is switched on or off.  
5. Remove the charger by tilting  
the plug upwards.  
1. Make sure the battery is inserted in your P908 and the cover  
is closed.  
2. Connect the charger to  
the P908 at the base of  
the phone by the flash  
symbol. The charger  
plug flash symbol must  
face upwards.  
Care instructions  
Your P908 is a highly sophisticated electronic device. To get the  
most out of it, please make sure that you follow this advice:  
3. Connect the charger to  
the mains.  
Keep the P908 in its protective bag when not using it.  
Charging is indicated by the battery meter on the screen pulsing  
continuously, and the indicator at the top of the P908 showing a  
steady red light (or green, if the P908 is switched on).  
Use a commercial glass screen cleaner sprayed on a cloth,  
when you clean the screen.  
Use only the stylus provided to tap the screen.  
See also ‘Battery Use and Care’ on page 183.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12  
Getting to know your P908  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
First time start-up  
Importing phone book entries  
Please read ‘Guidelines for safe and efficient use’ on page 182  
You may want to import existing contact information from  
another mobile phone to your P908. You can do this in several  
ways:  
before you start using your P908.  
When you start your P908 for the first time  
Beam the phone book entries from the other phone by  
infrared or Bluetooth wireless technology and save the set to  
Contacts. See ‘Creating and editing contacts’ on  
page 102.  
1. Open the Flip. Press the On/Off button. The Setup Wizard starts  
automatically and guides you through the essential settings.  
These include time and date settings, and information on the  
Jog Dial, text entry, and status bar. Follow the instructions on  
the screen.  
Synchronize the SIM and the internal memory on the other  
phone with one of the PC PIM applications supported by  
your P908. Then you can synchronize this information with  
2. The Power menu opens. Select Phone on.  
3. Enter your PIN when the dialogue box appears and press  
Contacts  
.
. Press  
to delete a digit.  
Note When you synchronize  
Contacts with your PC PIM  
application, the SIM information will not be synchronized. You  
might get two versions of the same contact. See  
‘Synchronization and backup’ on page 140.  
Turning your P908 on and off  
By default the Power menu prompts you to choose normal  
Phone book entries stored on your SIM card are accessible  
through Contacts. Select SIM in the folders menu to the  
right in the menu bar to see the list of entries in your SIM  
phone book. These entries can be imported to  
operation or Flight mode each time you press the On/Off button.  
These settings can be turned off. See To use the Power menu’  
on page 52.  
Contacts  
.
In Flight mode the phone and Bluetooth functions are switched  
off, but you can still use the other functions. Set your P908 in  
Flight mode where the use of mobile phones is not allowed. You  
can also use Flight mode if you want to use the other functions but  
do not want incoming calls.  
See ‘Copying contacts to and from the SIM card’ on  
page 105.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting to know your P908  
13  
             
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Flip removed  
Operational modes  
The Flip can also be removed, which makes the organizer  
The P908 works in different operational modes:  
applications easier to access. When the Flip is removed, the  
P908 works in Flip open operational mode.  
Flip closed  
With the keypad Flip closed, the P908 can be used like a  
conventional mobile phone using the keypad to dial and the Jog  
Note Turn off the P908 before you remove the flip to avoid to  
damage your phone.  
Dial to navigate. For more information please see ‘Jog Dial’ on  
page 18 and ‘Keypad functions’ on page 19.  
You can open the Flip at any time to continue working. Many  
more functions are available when the Flip is open.  
Flip open  
When the Flip is opened, the large touch-screen is revealed. You  
use the stylus to tap the screen to navigate and enter data. There  
is also a handwriting recognition feature, so that you can use the  
stylus to write on the screen.  
The Jog Dial provides further navigation and selection  
capability. Closing the Flip generally ends an activity and saves  
the data. Multimedia phone calls and data sessions will,  
however, continue.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14  
Getting to know your P908  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Flip closed mode  
C
Applications  
B
D
E
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CommuniCorder  
Music player  
Messages  
Contacts  
A
Applications  
CommuniCorder  
Sony Ericsson  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Music player  
Messages  
Contacts  
Calendar  
Tasks  
Calendar  
Tasks  
Jotter  
Sound recorder  
Connections  
11:20am  
Call list  
21/06/2004  
Jotter  
Sound recorder  
OK  
OK  
C
C
A
B
C
D
E
Shortcut to the Messages application  
Shortcut to the Contacts application  
Shortcut to the Call list application  
Shortcut to the Calendar application  
Tip When  
view is selected, it is also possible to start an  
application by pressing its specific number.  
Closing applications  
The current application automatically closes and the data is  
saved when you return to the standby view or switch to another  
application. To return to standby, press and hold  
Jog Dial backwards.  
Shows all applications available in Flip closed mode  
Standby view  
or press the  
The standby view shows shortcuts to the most commonly used  
applications. Choose which shortcuts you want to use in  
standby. See ‘Personalizing your P908’ on page 144.  
Options menu  
Press  
or press the Jog Dial forwards to open the standby  
Selecting and starting applications  
Rotate the Jog Dial to select an application. Press the Jog Dial or  
to start the application.  
options menu to get access to keylock, battery status, missed  
calls and more.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting to know your P908  
15  
         
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Flip open mode  
A
B
C
D
E
F
Shortcut to the Messages application  
Shortcut to the Contacts application  
Shortcut to the Phone application  
C
D
E
B
Shortcut to the Calendar application  
Shortcut to the Internet application  
Shows all applications available in Flip open mode  
F
CommuniCorder  
Pictures  
A
Video  
Music player  
Internet  
Messages  
Contacts  
Phone  
You can change the shortcuts A-E. See ‘Changing your  
application shortcuts’ on page 144.  
Applications View  
All  
CommuniCorder  
Pictures  
Video  
Calendar  
Tasks  
Navigation  
Music player  
Internet  
Jotter  
When the Flip is open, the application shortcut icons shown in  
the Flip closed mode move to the top row in the Flip open  
screen. You navigate by using the stylus and tapping selected  
items and by using the Jog Dial, see ‘Jog Dial’ on page 18.  
Messages  
Contacts  
Phone  
Control panel  
Calculator  
Calendar  
Tasks  
Sound recorder  
Time  
Jotter  
Viewer  
Control panel  
Calculator  
File manager  
Remote Sync  
Online services  
Demo  
i
Flip removed  
You can use your P908 without the physical Flip. When the Flip  
is removed, the P908 works in Flip open mode.  
GPRS data log  
Chess  
Solitaire  
Dictionary  
To remove and attach the Flip, refer to the separate instructions.  
Note Please note that Sony Ericsson does not accept any  
liability for lost parts or product defects resulting from any  
disassembly or modification of the product.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
16  
Getting to know your P908  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Virtual flip  
When the virtual flip is enabled,  
when the virtual flip is open. Select  
flip.  
is shown on the status bar  
to ‘close’ the virtual  
Item  
A Application Displays six icons for quick and easy access to the  
picker most common applications. These can be customized.  
Description  
B Menu bar Usually contains two menus on the left, and a folder  
menu on the right. The two left-hand menus contain:  
• the application menu, whose name is always the  
same as the application. It contains the system  
When the virtual flip is closed, the virtual flip keypad is shown.  
Select to ‘open’ the virtual flip.  
You must activate the virtual flip, when you have removed the  
Flip keypad, by tapping the Enable virtual flip checkbox in  
Control Panel > Other > Flip removed.  
services used by most applications, such as Find  
,
Send as, and Delete  
• the edit menus contain editing items such as Cut  
Preferences and Help.  
.
,
Copy Paste, Zoom,  
,
In Flip open, the menu bar shows the function of the  
key.  
Screen areas  
When the Flip is closed, you use the keyboard and the Jog Dial.  
When the Flip is open the screen is touch-sensitive. The screen  
is divided into a number of areas: see the figure and table below.  
C Application Applications use this central area of the screen to  
area  
display the essential information.  
Many of the built-in applications are based on two  
standard view layouts: a list view and a detail view.  
A
E
D Button bar An application view displays a button bar that  
contains useful controls and shortcuts. Not all  
application views require a button bar.  
11:03  
I
n
te  
r
t
F
B
John Smith  
+4613244500 (h)  
E Status bar Displays device status information such as: signal  
strength, battery and device information, settings for  
sounds and time, on-screen keyboard, as well as  
temporary indicators such as missed calls and unread  
messages.  
C
B
C
End call  
Sony Ericsson  
F Title bar  
Displays the name of the active application.  
D
E
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting to know your P908  
17  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Jog Dial  
Action  
Function  
Up  
Rotate the Jog Dial (up)  
Scrolls items in a list up / to the left,  
increases volume during a call, moves  
back a page when playing a  
multimedia message.  
Down  
Rotate the Jog Dial (down)  
Scrolls items in a list down / to the  
right, decreases volume during a call,  
moves forward a page when playing a  
multimedia message.  
Inward  
Press the Jog Dial (inwards) Selects a highlighted item, dials  
selected phone numbers. Generally the  
same action as  
in Flip closed.  
Press the Jog Dial  
(backwards)  
Goes back to the previous screen,  
dismisses dialogues, and sends a busy  
signal to the calling party when you  
receive a call. It will not end a call.  
Backward  
Forward  
Always the same action as  
closed and in Flip open.  
in Flip  
Press the Jog Dial (forwards) Flip closed: brings up the Options  
menu. Press and hold takes you to the  
Applications list.  
Flip open: toggles the Application,  
Edit and Category menus. Press and  
hold takes you to the Application  
launcher.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
18  
Getting to know your P908  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Key  
Function  
Keypad functions  
STAR  
Key  
Function  
• Enter the character  
*.  
• Press and hold to enter a  
p
(pause) character.  
OK Enter selected function, indicated on the  
• Press to switch between the different input types  
(for Chinese input Pinyin, Stroke, 123; for  
latin input Abc, abc, ABC, 123). See ‘Text  
entry types’ on page 31.  
• Press and hold to change between T9 and  
multitap.  
display above the key.  
BACK  
• Return to previous menu.  
• Reject an incoming call.  
• Press and hold to return to Standby.  
CLEAR  
HASH  
• Enter the character #.  
• Enter space.  
• Press and hold to change input language (Chinese  
or English).  
• Delete entered characters/digits from the screen  
one by one.  
• Press and hold to delete an entire row of entered  
characters/digits.  
• Delete an entry from Contacts, Calendar, Tasks,  
Sound Recorder, and Messages.  
• Press and hold to disconnect the microphone  
(mute function) when a call is in progress.  
• Mute the ring signal during an incoming call.  
• Pause/play the melody when the Music player is  
open.  
-
NUMERIC KEYS  
• Press and hold keys 0 to 9 to enter digits 0 to 9.  
• Press and hold keys 1 to 6 to select Chinese  
characters.  
• Press key 1 to enter voice mail.  
• Enter associated characters or perform associated  
functions. See ‘Shortcuts’ on page 45.  
• Press and hold digits 2 to 9 to open Contacts.  
Note Multitap input only applies when latin  
(English) is selected as input language.  
• Press and hold to put the P908 into silent mode,  
when in the standby view.  
OPTIONS  
• Open the menu with different options for  
different applications.  
• Press and hold to open Applications.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting to know your P908  
19  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Icon  
Function  
Indicators and status bar icons  
SMS notification  
These icons appear in the Flip closed standby screen or in the  
status bar when the Flip is open. When the Flip is open, you can  
often tap the icons to get more detailed information or start an  
application.  
MMS notification  
E-mail notification  
SMS overflow  
Time  
Icon  
Function  
Signal strength, GPRS status  
Battery strength  
Bluetooth on  
Time, alarm set  
Key lock  
Bluetooth discoverable  
Infrared on  
Magic word  
Keyboard  
GPRS active  
Multimedia volume  
Speakerphone  
Muted microphone  
Silent mode  
GPRS data transfer in progress  
Ongoing data call  
Ongoing call  
Missed call  
Home network  
Voicemail notification  
Divert all calls notification  
Calls screened  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
20  
Getting to know your P908  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
The Memory Stick Duo supplied with the P908 may or may not  
Memory Stick Duo™  
be a version that contains the lock function. Remember, you can  
The Memory Stick Duo provides a convenient way of increasing  
overwrite existing files without the lock function.  
the storage space in your P908. You can save still images, video  
clips, music, and voice recordings as well as computer data and  
applications on a Memory Stick Duo and use it to store or  
transfer the contents for many different purposes. These include:  
To remove the Memory Stick Duo  
Press the edge of the Memory Stick Duo using your fingernail or  
the stylus to release it. You hear a click as it jumps out of the  
slot.  
Storing backup copies of important files.  
Note Be careful when removing the Memory Stick Duo to avoid  
dropping it.  
Storing media for personalizing your P908.  
Storing media for use when composing MMS messages.  
Storing installation files for new applications.  
Transferring data between the P908 and a PC or Mac.  
Providing storage for third-party applications.  
Renaming a Memory Stick Duo  
You can rename a Memory Stick Duo to give it a name that is  
meaningful to you. The name you set will be shown in the  
divider between internal and external storage in the folder menu.  
See ‘Folders’ on page 27. There are two ways to rename a  
Memory Stick Duo:  
To insert the Memory Stick Duo  
1. Open the cover for the Memory  
Stick Duo slot.  
Select  
See ‘Format disk’ on page 166.  
Select  
Control Panel > Other > Format disk and tap Rename.  
2. Insert the Memory Stick Duo in  
the slot, with the connector side  
towards the back (see picture).  
Make sure it is securely inserted.  
A click should be heard.  
File manager > File > Format disk and tap Rename  
.
Renaming will not erase any data.  
Me  
m
or  
y
S
tick  
D
uo  
Note Insert the Memory Stick Duo  
correctly to avoid damage to your  
P908 or the Memory Stick Duo.  
Copying and moving data  
For information on how to copy and move data to and from the  
Memory Stick Duo, refer to ‘Folders’ on page 27.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting to know your P908  
21  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Other devices must access the same folder structure to interact  
with the P908 files. If you are using a PC, this is easily done by  
browsing to the required folder on the Memory Stick.  
Formatting a Memory Stick Duo  
If you need to reformat a Memory Stick Duo, select  
Control  
Panel > Other > Format disk, or select  
File manager > File > Format  
disk. When you format a disk, you delete all the information on  
it, including any applications that you may have installed.  
Memory Stick enabled devices which do not allow you to  
browse and manage a folder structure may not be able to share  
data directly with the applications in your P908 (for example,  
Memory Stick enabled digital cameras). However, the File  
Manager can access these files and move them into the correct  
folders for use by the applications. When your P908 is  
Sharing data with other devices  
Your P908 uses the shorter memory stick variant, Memory Stick  
Duo.  
connected to your PC, you also have access to the P908 folder  
structure as well as other Memory Stick Duo content in My P908  
.
Memory Stick Duo Adapter  
Use the Memory Stick Duo adapter when using your Memory  
Stick Duo in a device equipped with a regular sized Memory  
Stick, for example a personal computer. Insert your Memory  
Stick Duo according to the picture on the adapter.  
Personal computer support  
Both PCs and Apple computers may be enabled for Memory  
Stick use via built-in Memory Stick slots, Floppy Disk adapters,  
PC card adapters, and Memory Stick enabled mouses. (Memory  
Stick Duo Adapter required.)  
Warning! Do not insert a Memory Stick Duo adapter without a  
Memory Stick Duo into a Memory Stick slot. This may damage  
the product. Always insert the adapter in the slot with the  
connector end (marked with a triangle) first.  
For more information about Sony Memory Stick, visit  
www.memorystick.com.  
Compatibility  
The P908 defines its own folder structure on a Memory Stick.  
Each application has its own set of folders. A folder created in  
one application is not visible in another.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
22  
Getting to know your P908  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Connecting the accessories  
A
The travel charger is connected to the desk stand or to the P908.  
Note The design of the charger will differ depending on the  
market.  
E
C
B
C
D
The USB connector from the desk stand is connected to a PC.  
The headset is connected to the P908.  
Other accessories can be connected to the connector at the base of  
the P908.  
E
A car holder can be connected to the antenna connector at the rear.  
Note Remove the plastic plug before connecting the P908 to the  
car holder.  
B
D
The wrist strap is threaded  
through the holes next to the  
connector at the bottom of the  
P908.  
A
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting to know your P908  
23  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
You can uninstall the demo application and also reinstall it from  
the Multimedia for P908 CD. See ‘Removing applications from  
your P908’ on page 134 for how to uninstall the demo  
Services  
You need the following services to use the P908 functions:  
application and ‘Installing applications on your P908’ on  
page 132 for how to reinstall it.  
To use...  
You need...  
phone services  
text messaging (SMS)  
GSM subscription  
GSM subscription  
To start the demo  
multimedia messaging (MMS) MMS account, GSM data subscription  
1. Select the Applications icon  
.
e-mail  
e-mail account, GSM data subscription  
2. Select the Demo icon  
The demo starts.  
.
Internet  
Internet account, WAP account (only  
for WAP 1.x services), GSM data  
subscription  
To stop the demo  
Tap the screen or rotate the Jog Dial to stop the demo.  
The demo also stops when any other dialogue is opened.  
data communication  
GSM data subscription  
Please consult your network operator and Internet service  
provider for more information about the services that are  
available to you.  
Note When the Flip is open, an incoming text or MMS message  
will not stop the demo.  
The Demo application can be launched also when the P908 is  
started without a SIM card inserted. When the P908 asks you to  
insert the SIM card, just press OK. If the Flip is closed, open it.  
Applications - overview  
You can start applications in different ways. Select icons in the  
standby view (Flip closed) and in the application picker (Flip  
Phone  
open) to start the most important ones. Select  
applications.  
to list all  
This is the mobile phone application. When the Flip is opened,  
select  
to start it.  
Demo application  
The Demo application shows some of the most common  
functions in your P908.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
24  
Getting to know your P908  
         
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Call list  
Music player  
The call list displays the most recent calls, either outgoing,  
incoming or missed. In Flip closed, press the Jog Dial or  
to call the selected entry. To view the call list when the Flip is  
open, open Phone and select the call list view by tapping the  
icon.  
Plays music tracks and other audio files. You can download  
these from the Internet or transfer them from your PC. The  
player supports the most common sound formats. You can save  
music tracks on the Memory Stick Duo.  
Internet (Flip open only)  
CommuniCorder  
The Internet browser can access both Web and WAP pages. It  
can also download images, video clips, audio files, and Java  
applications.  
For taking video clips and still pictures. In CommuniCorder  
view, the screen becomes a viewfinder. Press the  
CommuniCorder button or the Jog Dial to start recording or take  
a photo. Alternatively tap the red button at the bottom of the  
screen.  
Messages  
You can read, create, send and delete text (SMS), multimedia  
(MMS) and e-mail messages in this view.  
Pictures (Flip open only)  
Contacts  
Manages your pictures. You can take pictures with  
CommuniCorder, or receive them via e-mail, Bluetooth wireless  
technology and infrared communication. Download via the  
Internet browser, or transfer them from your PC. With the image  
editor you can also edit your pictures.  
Displays a list of your contacts. Select a contact to view  
associated contact data.  
Calendar  
The Calendar view displays entries for the current day. Use the  
Jog Dial to get more information about a selected entry or to  
change days.  
Video (Flip open only)  
Plays video clips. You can record video with CommuniCorder,  
download them from Internet or transfer them from your PC.  
You can stream video and audio from the Internet.  
Tasks  
Keeps track of your tasks. Set due date, alarm, priority, and so  
on, for all your tasks and let your P908 remind you in time.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting to know your P908  
25  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Jotter  
File manager (Flip open only)  
Displays a list of stored entries. In detailed view, the complete  
entry is displayed.  
You can handle the content and organisation of media, both in  
the P908 and on the Memory Stick Duo  
Control panel (Flip open only)  
Remote Sync (Flip open only)  
Contains all settings that are system-wide and affect more than  
one application. This is the main view to use when initially  
setting up your P908.  
Performs synchronization over the air. Using GPRS, the P908  
can be continuously connected to the remote synchronization  
server. Remote Sync works equally well over CSD or HSCSD.  
Note Settings for Flight mode and P908 locks are located under  
Control panel > Device  
Online services  
i
Your service provider may offer different services, for example,  
weather forecasts, financial information or newsletters. Contact  
your service provider for more information.  
Calculator (Flip open only)  
A standard 10-digit calculator. You can add, subtract, multiply,  
divide, calculate square roots and percentages.  
GPRS data log (Flip open only)  
A list of GPRS Internet accounts. Open an account to view your  
logged GPRS traffic, including your costs. The P908 creates a  
new data log when a connection to an account is created.  
Sound recorder  
You can use your P908 as a sound recorder.  
Time (Flip open only)  
Shows time and date. You can set your current location and  
another. You can also set different alarms.  
Dictionary (Flip open only)  
The dictionary application contains both English - Chinese and  
Chinese - English dictionaries.  
Viewer (Flip open only)  
Connections (Flip closed only)  
Use it to view various types of documents: for example  
Microsoft® Word, Excel, Power Point, Adobe® Acrobat®  
(PDF files).  
Set the way you communicate with your PC or other devices.  
Select between infrared, Bluetooth wireless technology and  
cable. In the cable menu, you can also select whether the P908  
synchronizes with a PC or acts as a wireless modem.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
26  
Getting to know your P908  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
For each application there is a default Unfiled folder. Since there  
is no way of seeing on your P908, whether a file in an Unfiled  
General functions  
folder is located on your P908 or on a Memory Stick, we  
recommend that you move files to your own folders as soon as  
possible.  
Application launcher views  
In Flip open, the P908 can present the applications in two ways:  
Every item created in an application is always assigned to a  
single folder, by default the same folder as displayed in the list  
view.  
List view (small icons appear in one column)  
Icon view (large icons appear in two columns)  
In list view, the folder menu is used to organise your entries. In  
detail view, the folder menu allows you to change the folder of  
the current item.  
Folders  
Folders are used to organize information, for example contacts,  
jotter entries, or task lists. You might want to organize your  
contacts in business and personal folders.  
Using the folder menu  
In the applications that use folders you can see the folder menu  
to the right in the menu bar.  
Folders are also used when managing files of different types on  
your P908 and Memory Stick Duo. You might want to move or  
copy sound files into a sound track folder to store on a Memory  
Stick Duo.  
When a Memory Stick Duo is available in the P908, the folders  
on it are shown in the folder menu under the divider. If you  
rename the disk (see ‘Renaming a Memory Stick Duo’ on  
page 21) the divider will show the new name.  
As you may notice, if you connect your P908 to a PC and view  
the contents of your P908 in My P908, it is easier to get an  
overview of a folder and file structure on a large screen than on  
a handheld device. If you make it a habit to set up specific  
folders to suit your needs and use them to categorise all your  
information, working with it becomes easy.  
In list view, there is a super-folder called All, which, when  
selected, displays items from all folders (in  
Contacts, the All  
folder does not display the entries in the SIM phone book). All is  
the default value in list views and when an application is first  
launched.  
Each application has its own set of folders. A folder created in  
one application is not visible in another.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting to know your P908  
27  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Use the Edit Folders menu item to:  
Tip To delete multiple files in an application you can use  
Storage manager. See ‘Deleting or copying general files’ on  
page 168.  
Rename a folder, or move a folder to or from Memory Stick  
Duo. Select the folder you want to move or rename, tap Edit  
,
type the name of the new folder, and choose a Location from  
Managing your files  
the list. Tap Done  
To Add a new folder. Tap Add, enter a folder Name and choose  
Location from the list Tap Done  
.
Using the File Manager, you can handle the content and  
organisation of media, both in the P908 and on the Memory  
Stick Duo. See ‘File manager’ on page 124.  
a
.
.
To Delete a folder. Select the folder you want to delete and tap  
Delete. A folder can only be deleted if it is empty. Not all  
folders can be deleted.  
You can also use the Storage Manager in the Control Panel. See  
‘Storage manager’ on page 168.  
To copy all the files in a folder to another folder  
Zooming  
1. Open the folder in list view, and select Copy to in the main  
You can change the size of the screen fonts. Choose between  
Small, Medium or Large. From the menu bar, tap Edit > Zoom.  
application menu; for example Audio or Image  
.
2. Select the destination Folder from the list and select Copy.  
Automatic saving  
When you work in an application and leave it, your work is  
automatically saved.  
To move a file from one folder to another  
Open the file in detail view. In the folder menu, select the  
destination folder.  
To copy a file to another folder  
Find  
1. Open the file in detail view. In the folder menu, select the  
The Find function searches through all the items stored in an  
application. The standard Find dialogue contains a single text  
edit box with two buttons, Find and Cancel. Selecting Find starts  
the search, while Cancel closes the Find dialogue.  
destination folder. Select Copy to in the main application  
menu; for example Audio or Image  
.
2. Select the destination Folder from the list and tap Copy.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
28  
Getting to know your P908  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
In some applications, for example Messages, Find may be more  
complicated:  
Text message (using SMS): P908 will create a new text  
message. Add the mobile number of the recipient and tap  
Send  
.
The size of each message is so large that you may want to  
restrict the search to the current message only.  
E-mail: the P908 will create a new message with the item  
included as an attachment. Complete with address and  
Folders are potentially more significant, so you may want to  
restrict the search to the current folder only.  
subject, and tap Send  
.
Multimedia message (using MMS): the P908 will create a  
new message with the item included as an attachment.  
Sorting your files  
Complete the message and tap Send  
.
You can sort the files you have stored in your P908. By sorting  
your files, you choose in which order you want the files to be  
displayed on the screen. You can choose between sorting by, for  
example type, size, date, or name.  
Infrared: align the infrared port of the P908 with the infrared  
port of the other device. Select Send. Progress messages on  
screen will tell you when the information has been  
transferred.  
Note Sort is not included in all applications.  
Bluetooth wireless technology: the P908 will search the local  
area for paired devices. These will be presented in a list.  
Select a device to which the item is to be sent and select  
Send. Progress messages will tell you when the information  
has been transferred.  
Sending and receiving items  
From many applications it is possible to exchange items like  
appointments, contacts and images.  
Tip The other devices must have Bluetooth wireless technology  
enabled. You can select Refresh to perform a new search if, for  
example, a destination device was not enabled at first.  
To send an item using Send as  
1. Enter the Send as menu in the specific application.  
2. Depending on the application and item, you can choose  
between the following transfer methods:  
To handle items received in e-mail and multimedia messages  
1. Tap the notification icon  
, or  
open Messages and select MMS or an e-mail inbox.  
2. Open the message.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting to know your P908  
29  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
3. Select the attachments tab.  
Several other expansion-memory alternatives on the market.  
4. Select the required attachment. The attachment or a summary  
of the attachment will be displayed.  
Pictures on Sony Image Station on the Web:  
– For Europe: http://www.sonystyle-imaging.com  
– For Japan: http://www.imagestation.jp  
– For USA: http://www.imagestation.com  
5. Select Save to save the item. You may optionally display the  
received item within the related application.  
See ‘Messages’ on page 87 for more information.  
SIM card, for phone numbers and associated names. See  
‘Copying contacts to and from the SIM card’ on page 105.  
To receive beamed items  
1. Ensure that infrared or Bluetooth wireless technology is  
activated.  
Getting help  
From the menu bar tap Edit > Help to get to the P908 help system.  
The help system uses two views:  
2. For infrared, ensure that the infrared ports are aligned.  
3. The received item will be notified by a dialogue box listing  
the item(s) received.  
The Topics view shows all available topics, for example both  
specific application topics and general topics.  
4. Select View to view and save the item to the related  
application. Select Done and any unsaved items will be  
automatically saved for you in the Beamed inbox in  
Messages.  
The Detail view presents the title and text of a single topic.  
The Topics view allows you to select a topic, which opens the  
detail view/text view and displays the selected topic. You can  
also set the zoom level and exit the Help system.  
Methods for storing data  
Your P908 can store data in different ways:  
In many dialogue boxes you can select the Help icon  
upper right corner.  
in the  
Internal memory. Up to 13 MB of capacity for storing  
pictures, messages, music, applications, and so on,  
depending on applications in use.  
Memory Stick Duo (expansion memory).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
30  
Getting to know your P908  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
When you are editing text you can:  
Settings  
For settings that are application-specific, tap Edit > Preferences in  
the application menu bar. For generic settings, go to Control  
Press  
input language.  
and select Text options > Language to select text  
panel  
.
Press and hold  
English).  
to switch input language (Chinese or  
Press  
input type.  
and select Text options > Input type to select text  
Entering text  
Press  
to switch between the input types in text edit  
Entering text with the Flip closed  
mode.  
With the flip closed, you use the keypad keys to enter text, for  
example, when writing a text message.  
To input latin characters  
1. If required, select the desired latin text entry method.  
Text entry types  
There are four text entry types when you enter latin characters:  
2. Press a key to see a pre-edit box with the different characters  
wxyz9  
on that key in the title area:  
If the same key is pressed again, the next character in the pre-  
edit box will be selected.  
Abc – latin characters; initial uppercase letter, the rest  
lowercase.  
abc – latin characters; lowercase entry.  
ABC – latin characters; uppercase entry.  
123 – numeric entry only.  
3. Press the  
cursor. If continuously pressed, the  
characters and then whole words.  
key to delete the character to the left of the  
key deletes several  
4. Press and hold  
to start T9 text input, or to close it.  
There are three text entry types when you enter characters in  
Chinese:  
To input latin characters using T9 text input  
You can use T9 text input when writing, for example text  
messages and e-mail. The T9 text input method uses a built-in  
dictionary to recognise the most commonly used word for each  
Pinyin – Chinese characters; Pinyin input.  
Stroke – Chinese characters; Stroke input.  
123 – numeric entry only.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting to know your P908  
31  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
sequence of key presses. This way, you press each key only  
once, even when the letter you want is not the first letter on the  
4. Continue writing your message.  
Press  
to enter a full stop. To enter other punctuation  
key. Press and hold  
to change input method.  
marks, press  
and use the Jog Dial.  
The following example shows how to start writing a text.  
If you press  
and select Text options when writing, you get a  
1. Select, for example, Messages > Create SMS  
.
list of options:  
2. For example, if you want to write the word ‘Jane’, press  
.
Spell word, to edit the entered word.  
My words, to view the user dictionary.  
During text entry, a suggestion list with word candidates are  
presented. The most frequently used word is highlighted.  
Add symbol, adds symbols and punctuation marks.  
Input type, changes the text input type.  
3. If the word is the word you want:  
Copy all  
/
Paste, to copy all text to the clipboard, and for  
– Press  
or  
to accept and add a space.  
pasting the copied text to the place of the text cursor.  
If the word is not the one you want:  
Use T9 Use multitap, to switch between T9 text input and  
multitap text input.  
/
– Scroll with the Jog Dial up or down to view alternative  
words (candidates). Press  
add a space.  
to accept the word and  
Show suggestion list Hide suggestion list, to switch the  
/
candidates window on and off.  
If you do not find the word you want:  
Language, to change language,  
– Press  
to go to a list of options.  
for Chinese input, between Pinyin, Stroke and 123.  
– Select Text options > Spell word  
.
for latin input, between Abc, abc, ABC and 123  
– Edit the word using multitap text input and press  
.The word is added to the user dictionary. The next  
time you enter the word, it will appear as one of the  
alternative words. Note Multitap input only applies when  
latin (English) is selected as input language.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
32  
Getting to know your P908  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To input Chinese characters  
1. If required, select the desired Chinese text entry method.  
2. Input elements; the elements are shown to the right,  
candidates are shown on top. Refer to the mapping below.  
Continue inputting elements until the correct character is  
shown.  
Candidates  
area  
T
9
Jott  
Text  
area  
3. Rotate the Jog Dial to select the correct character.  
4. Press the Jog Dial to confirm the correct character.  
xiao  
xian  
zhao  
zhan  
Phonetic  
list  
Chinese key mapping  
Key  
1
Pinyin Stroke  
2
abc  
def  
ghi  
jkl  
T
9
3
Jott  
4
xiao  
5
Elements  
area  
6
mno  
pqrs  
tuv  
?
7
8
9
wxyz  
To input Chinese punctuation  
1. Select Chinese input language, and select the desired Chinese  
text entry method.  
2. Press the  
button when no candidate area is shown.  
3. Rotate the Jog Dial to select the correct character.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting to know your P908  
33  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
4. Press the Jog Dial to confirm the correct character.  
The current input field is shown to the left in the top bar of the  
keyboard. Tap the arrows or rotate the Jog Dial to change the  
input field. The keyboard top bar also contains a drop-down  
Inserting symbols  
When you are editing text you can press  
and, depending  
menu with Cut Copy and Paste. When copying or cutting, the text  
,
on the application, choose Text options > Add symbol to select an  
item from the symbol selector table. Use the Jog Dial to select  
must be selected first.  
the row and press  
symbol and press  
. Then scroll within the row to select a  
. When the candidate area is invisible,  
To input latin and numeric characters  
1. Select the button representing the characters to input:  
- Latin characters  
press  
area.  
to make the symbol table display in the candidate  
- Numeric characters  
Entering text with the Flip open  
There are two ways of entering text with the Flip open:  
2. Tap the keys on the keyboard; the text will be displayed  
simultaneously in the text area.  
More characters become available if you tap the shift and  
caps keys.  
Use the on-screen keyboard  
screen.  
located at the bottom of the  
Note The numeric keyboard is equipped with a button switching  
Write directly on the screen using the stylus.  
between full width  
and punctuations.  
and half width  
numerical characters  
On-screen keyboard  
When you need to edit text, tap the keyboard icon in the status  
bar and then select characters. Tap Done when ready  
To input Chinese characters  
The P908 has two Chinese input methods: Pinyin and Stroke.  
You can choose between different types of keyboard layouts  
using the buttons at the bottom of the keyboard.  
Both methods require that you create a character in two steps.  
1. Select the button representing the input method:  
or  
Pinyin  
Stroke (the Pinyin keyboard is shown by default).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
34  
Getting to know your P908  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
2. Tap one or more components of the character in the character  
component area. The selected components are shown in the  
element area, and a group of possible character candidates is  
shown in the candidates area.  
Done  
Text  
area  
Candidates  
area  
3. Tap the desired character in the candidates area. The  
character appears in the text area and the associated  
characters are shown in the candidates area.  
(
)
[
1
6
[
2
7
Elements  
area  
c
&
$
3
8
4 5  
9 0  
%
#
@
The more you specify the character – the more input you make –  
the fewer candidates will be left. If there are more candidates  
than can be displayed at once, use the next candidate  
Character  
components  
area  
and the  
previous candidate  
buttons to scroll.  
Stroke keyboard  
Handwriting recognition  
Done  
Text  
area  
Handwriting recognition translates stylus gestures into letters,  
digits or other characters, and displays these characters as text.  
Handwriting recognition is only active in places where text can  
be input.  
Candidates  
area  
Latin letters and Chinese characters are input in different input  
modes.  
Elements  
area  
Character  
components  
area  
(
)
The text mode screen is divided into an upper and a lower part  
divided by an arrow  
at the right edge. The position of the  
arrow will change according to the current input mode, in the  
middle when in latin input mode, and above the middle when in  
Chinese input mode.  
Pinyin keyboard  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting to know your P908  
35  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
The candidates bar at the bottom of the screen can be switched  
To input latin and numeric characters  
on  
corner.  
or off  
by tapping the button in the lower right-hand  
1. If required, select the latin  
input button  
.
Jotter Edit  
Unfiled  
2. Write each letter in a  
single stroke, in different  
parts of the screen,  
depending on the desired  
letter:  
To switch between Chinese and latin input mode, tap the button  
at the left of the candidates bar, or write a stroke from down to  
up with the stylus.  
Mark text by putting the stylus on the text, wait a moment, and  
drag the stylus over the text.  
– Write lowercase letters  
below the arrow.  
– Write uppercase letters  
in line with the arrow.  
– Write numbers above  
the arrow.  
a
a
3. If required, select a letter  
in the candidates area.  
Note Most letters can be written in alternate styles, see tables  
below. The style itself does not matter when writing uppercase  
or lowercase, as it is the position of the screen that decides  
whether it will be uppercase or lowercase.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
36  
Getting to know your P908  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Latin characters  
Numeric characters  
(
0
1
a
n
o
p
q
r
.
8
9
+
-
)
b
c
d
e
,
?
2
3
4
5
6
&
@
/
.
\
s
f
g
t
h
u
v
w
x
y
z
7
2
1
i
Note Start each stroke at the dotted end.  
j
k
l
m
Note Start each stroke at the dotted end.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting to know your P908  
37  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To input Chinese characters  
The stroke system has the 33 basic strokes in eight stroke  
categories. These are:  
1. If required, select the  
Chinese input button  
.
Stroke Basic stroke Stroke name  
Long Left Slope  
Straight Left Slope  
Short Left Slope  
Over  
Character  
Jotter Edit  
Unfiled  
2. Write each letter using one  
or more strokes, in  
different parts of the  
screen, depending on the  
desired letter:  
– Write Chinese  
characters below the  
arrow.  
Lift  
Dot  
Right Slope  
– Write numbers above  
the arrow.  
Down-Over  
Left Slope-Over  
Left Slope-Dot  
Down Hook  
3. Select a character in the  
candidates area.  
4. The association characters  
are shown in the  
Right Slope-Hook  
Over-Hook  
association area.  
Down-Over  
Note It is important that the strokes are entered in the correct  
order, otherwise you may not get the character you want.  
Down Over-Hook  
Down Over-Left  
Slope  
Down Over-Down  
Hook  
Down Over-Down  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
38  
Getting to know your P908  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Chinese punctuation  
Stroke Basic stroke Stroke name  
Down  
Character  
(
,
Down-Hook  
)
Short Slope Down  
Over-Hook  
1
3
2
.
1
2
Over-Down  
;
:
?
!
Over Down-Hook  
Over-Left Slope  
1
2
Over-Down-Over-  
Left Slope  
Note Start each stroke at the dotted end.  
Over-Down-  
Curved Hook  
Numeric characters  
Over-Down-Over-  
Down-Hook  
(
0
1
8
9
+
-
)
Over-Down-Over-  
Down  
2
3
4
5
6
Curved Hook  
Over-Down-Hook  
Over-Down-Over  
Over-Down-Lift  
/
.
\
7
Note Start each stroke at the dotted end.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting to know your P908  
39  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
An error message informs you if a wrong PIN code has been  
P908 locks  
entered. Usually, the SIM card will be blocked after three wrong  
Use the SIM card lock and the device lock to protect your SIM  
attempts (the number of attempts is SIM-card dependent), and  
card and your P908 from unauthorized use. Use the key lock to  
you need to enter the PUK code to unblock it.  
prevent the keys from being accidentally pressed.  
The PUK code consists of eight digits. When you have entered  
the right PUK code you must enter a new PIN code. You have  
ten attempts to enter the PUK code. If all ten attempts fail, the  
Note You can usually make an emergency call without  
unlocking the P908.  
SIM card will be disabled and you need to contact your network  
operator.  
SIM card lock  
The SIM card lock protects your SIM card, not the P908, against  
unauthorized use. It is unlocked by the PIN and PUK codes  
which you receive from your service provider.  
You cannot change the PUK code.  
PIN2  
Some functions on the SIM card can be protected by a  
secondary code feature. Some SIM cards do not have a PIN2  
lock.  
You can choose to have to unlock the SIM card every time you  
turn the P908 on, or to have the SIM card unlocked.  
Your PIN (Personal Identification Number) code consists of four  
to eight digits. If you activate the SIM card lock, the P908 will  
ask for the PIN code every time you turn it on. You unlock the  
SIM card by entering the PIN code.  
The PIN2 lock cannot be deactivated. The code can be changed  
by a user who knows the old code.  
Device lock  
The device lock protects your P908 and the data in it against  
unauthorized use.  
To activate the SIM card lock  
1. Select  
Control panel > Device > Locks.  
2. Select a lock option.  
If the device lock is set to When SIM changed, it means that the  
P908 is not normally locked. However, if the SIM has been  
changed, the P908 asks you to enter the code to unlock the P908  
3. Select Done  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
40  
Getting to know your P908  
             
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
before you can use it. This means that if someone steals your  
P908 and puts another SIM card into it, they will not be able to  
Change code  
use it.  
To change a code  
1. Select  
Control panel > Device > Locks.  
Note Your operator can block your SIM, if you report that your  
phone has been stolen.  
2. Select Change Codes.  
3. Select the code you want to change.  
The device lock is not on when you buy your P908. You can  
change the device lock code to any four to eight digit personal  
code.  
4. First enter the old code, then the new one. (To ensure that  
you have typed the new code correctly you have to enter it  
twice.)  
The default device lock code is 0000.  
Automatic key lock  
To activate the device lock  
1. Select  
2. Select a lock option.  
3. Select Done  
Control panel > Device > Locks.  
This option locks the keys on your P908. This is to protect the  
device if the keys are accidentally pressed. When this setting is  
active, the Flip closed keypad will become automatically locked  
after a period of inactivity.  
.
You can choose to have the P908 locked every time you turn it  
on, locked when the SIM card has been changed, or unlocked.  
To activate or change the key lock  
Select  
Control panel > Device > Locks.  
It is also possible to use the device lock in combination with the  
screen saver. Just mark the checkbox  
Display > Screen > Screen saver device lock to have the device lock  
Control panel > Device >  
To unlock the keys  
Select  
>
.
activated when the screen saver goes on.  
Note When using the screen saving device lock, make sure you  
have set the device lock to activate at Power on. Otherwise your  
P908 will be unprotected after Power on, until the screen saver  
goes on.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting to know your P908  
41  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Screen lock  
This option locks the screen of your P908. This is to protect the  
device if the screen is accidentally pressed in Flip open mode or  
with the Flip removed. When this setting is active, the screen  
will automatically become locked after a period of inactivity.  
To activate or change the screen lock  
1. Select  
> Settings.  
2. Select a lock time or Off  
.
To lock the screen  
Select  
> Lock screen.  
To unlock the screen  
Push the Jog Dial Forward > Inward or Backward > Inward  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
42  
Getting to know your P908  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Phone  
The P908 is a full-featured mobile phone having full integration  
with the other functions of the device, including applications  
from developers outside Sony Ericsson, so-called third-party  
applications.  
With the Flip closed you can access most of the functions using  
the Jog Dial and the keypad. More advanced tasks such as  
handling conference calls or using other applications during a  
call are best handled with the Flip open.  
The phone includes useful features such as:  
The P908 supports Customer Service Profile (CSP). This means  
that some options may be hidden depending on your  
subscription.  
personalized ring types.  
Picture phone book  
Quick access back to the entry in Contacts, making it easy to  
try an alternative number or send an e-mail if the contact is  
unavailable or busy.  
Call handling with the Flip  
closed  
Voice-dialling – make a call by saying the contact’s name.  
With the Flip closed, you can use either the keypad or the Jog  
Dial to handle calls.  
Voice answer – an incoming call may be answered or sent a  
busy signal, using the words recorded for ‘answer’ and  
‘busy’.  
Outgoing calls  
Access to other applications while talking on the phone.  
Office handsfree (speakerphone) which is enabled when the  
Flip is open, making it easy to access applications such as  
Calendar and Jotter while talking.  
To make a call  
Enter the phone number on the keypad and press the Jog Dial or  
press  
.
Flight mode which enables the P908 to be used as a PDA in  
situations where radio transmitters may not be used. The  
GSM and Bluetooth transmitters (and receivers) are switched  
off.  
Press  
delete all characters  
to delete a typed character. Press and hold  
to  
.
Press and hold  
to insert the international call prefix  
+.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Phone  
43  
           
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Press  
and select Hide my number, if you do not want to  
To make a call using the Call list  
1. Select on the standby screen.  
2. Press the Jog Dial or  
3. Scroll the list by rotating the Jog Dial and select an entry.  
4. Press the Jog Dial or  
show your phone number to the party you are calling. Select  
Show my number, if you want to show it.  
.
If a call is not successfully connected, the P908 can be set to  
automatically retry to connect the call. When a retry is  
successful, the P908 alerts you with a single ring signal.  
.
To make a call using the Contact list  
1. Select on the standby screen.  
2. Press the Jog Dial or  
To make an emergency call  
Enter the emergency number on the keypad and press the Jog  
Dial or press  
.
.
3. Scroll the list by rotating the Jog Dial and select a contact.  
4. Scroll by rotating the Jog Dial and select the desired number.  
Usually, but not always, no SIM card or PIN code is required for  
emergency calls and you will be able to make the call as long as  
the available network allows and you have coverage from a  
GSM network. Check with your local provider to find out if  
emergency calls are possible without a SIM card, and which  
emergency call numbers are supported.  
5. Press the Jog Dial or  
.
For more information, see ‘Contacts’ on page 99.  
To make a call using voice control  
To make a call using Speed dial  
Speed dial is a fast way to call one of your special speed dial  
numbers. See ‘Set up speed dial numbers’ on page 51.  
1. There are three ways to use the voice recognition function.  
– Press and hold the Jog Dial.  
– Press and hold  
.
1. Select the key corresponding to the number of the speed dial  
contact.  
– Say the ‘Magic word’.  
– Press the call button on the headset.  
When the Magic word function is activated, the  
appears in the status bar.  
The speed dial name is shown above the  
key. If a  
icon  
picture is attached to the speed dial, the picture is also shown.  
2. Press  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
44  
Phone  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
2. When you hear a short tone, say the voice command linked  
to the number you want to call. See ‘To record a voice  
command’ on page 56. The P908 will connect you with the  
matching contact.  
Press  
for the last dialled number.  
Incoming calls  
When you receive a call, the name of the caller will be displayed  
if the calling party is in Contacts. If there is an associated picture  
it will also be shown in a small or large version. See ‘Incoming  
call picture’ on page 55.  
You can use voice control when the P908 is handheld, used with  
a handsfree set (car or portable), or with a Bluetooth wireless  
technology headset. Magic word cannot be used together with a  
Bluetooth wireless technology headset.  
To handle an incoming call  
For more information, see Voice control’ on page 55.  
You can press  
to answer the call or answer by voice  
control, see Voice control’ on page 55.  
To end a call  
Press  
, or press the Jog Dial.  
You can press  
signal.  
to reject a call and press  
to silence the ring  
Shortcuts  
An incoming call will bring up the following options:  
Press and hold  
to dial your voicemail. With the Flip  
1 Answer – Answer the call.  
open, select Phone > Call voice mail  
.
2 Send Busy – Reject the call. The calling party will hear a  
See Voice mail’ on page 58 on how to set up voicemail.  
busy tone and the call will be logged as a rejected call.  
Press any of the keys from to followed by  
3 Mute – Silence the ring signal. The calling party will not  
notice that you have silenced the call. The call will be logged  
as a missed call.  
to call a speed dial number.  
twice to call the last dialled number.  
Press and hold any of the keys from to  
your Contact list. Press again to reach the next letter.  
Additional key presses will add letters to your search.  
Press  
to open  
If a large picture of the caller fills the screen, you can use the  
Jog Dial to get the menu with the options above.  
Press any digit followed by  
in the SIM phone book.  
to reach a phone number  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Phone  
45  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Speakerphone On/Off You can use the P908 as a  
speakerphone. See ‘Speakerphone’ on page 51.  
Options during or after a call  
Use the Jog Dial to change the phone volume during a call.  
Applications – Open another application, and, for example,  
paste a copied phone number into a Jotter entry.  
Press  
to get a list of call handling options. The list will  
vary depending on the situation. Options that concern two or  
more active calls are described in ‘Handling two or more calls’  
on page 49.  
Press and hold  
reactivate the microphone.  
to mute the microphone. Press  
again to  
End call – End the active call.  
Hold call/retrieve call – Put the active call on hold /retrieve the  
held call. This is useful if you want to make a new call during  
a call.  
Call handling with the Flip open  
You use the stylus and the virtual keypad to handle calls with the  
Flip open.  
Add to contacts – Create a new Contacts entry if the phone  
number of the active call is known, and not already stored in  
Contacts.  
Outgoing calls  
Show contact – Display the entry in Contacts, if any, that  
corresponds to the phone number of the active call.  
To make a call  
1. Select  
opened.  
in the application picker. The Speed dial view is  
Transfer sound – Transfer the call to a Bluetooth wireless  
technology headset.  
2. Tap  
on the button bar.  
Turn On/Off tones You can send DTMF tones with the  
keypad, ‘Controlling tone-based services’ on page 52.  
3. Enter the digits with the virtual keypad and tap  
right of the keypad, or press the Jog Dial inwards.  
on the  
Microphone mute On/Off – Turn the microphone on or off.  
To delete a typed character - select  
. If you do not want to  
Copy number – Copy a phone number for exchange with other  
text fields or applications.  
show your phone number to the party you are calling, select  
Phone > Hide my number after you have entered the digits.  
Select Show my number, if you want to show it.  
Paste number – Paste a copied number into a field.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
46  
Phone  
           
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
If a call is not successfully connected, the P908 can be set to  
automatically retry to connect the call. When a retry is  
successful, the P908 alerts you with a single ring signal.  
To make a call using the Contact list  
1. Select in the application picker.  
2. Select an entry by rotating the Jog Dial and pressing it  
inwards.  
To make a call using Speed  
dial  
3. Select a phone number by rotating the Jog Dial.  
4. Press the Jog Dial inwards.  
P
h
o
ne
E
dit  
Speed dial is a fast way to call  
one of your special speed dial  
numbers. See ‘Set up speed  
dial numbers’ on page 51. This  
is the default phone view.  
Sony Ericsson  
1
2
3
You can also tap the contact and/or number using the stylus.  
John  
4
Sandra  
5
Susan(w)  
6
To make a call using voice control  
1. There are three ways to use the voice recognition function.  
– Press and hold the Jog Dial.  
1. Select  
bar.  
on the button  
Mike  
7
Julia(h)  
8
Robert  
9
– Say the Magic word.  
2. Use the Jog Dial or tap with  
the stylus to select an entry.  
– Press the call button on the headset.  
When the Magic word function is activated, the  
appears in the status bar.  
icon  
Elizabeth  
Empty  
Empty  
To make a call using the Call  
list  
2. When you hear a short tone, say the voice command  
1. Select  
bar.  
from the button  
connected to the number you want to call. See To record a  
voice command’ on page 56. The P908 will connect you with  
the matching contact.  
2. Select an entry by rotating the Jog Dial and pressing it  
inwards. You can also tap the entry using the stylus.  
You can use voice control when the P908 is handheld, used with  
a handsfree set (car or portable), or with a Bluetooth wireless  
technology headset. Magic word cannot be used together with a  
Bluetooth wireless technology headset.  
3. Select  
.
Note Calling from the Call list is only possible in Compact  
mode, Edit > Compact mode  
.
For more information, see Voice control’ on page 55.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Phone  
47  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To end a call  
Options that concern two or more active calls are described in  
Select End call, or press the Jog Dial.  
‘Handling two or more calls’ on page 49.  
End call – End the active call.  
Incoming calls  
Hold call/retrieve call – Put the active call on hold/retrieve the  
held call.  
When you receive a call, if the calling party is found in  
Contacts, the name of the caller will be displayed. If there is a  
picture, it will also be shown in a small or large version. See  
‘Incoming call picture’ on page 55.  
Add to contacts – Create a new Contacts entry. This option  
appears automatically after a call if the phone number of the  
call is known, and not already stored in Contacts. See ‘Add to  
contacts’ on page 56.  
To handle an incoming call  
Show contact – Display the entry in Contacts, if any, that  
Use the screen buttons to select what to do.  
corresponds to the phone number of the active call.  
Answer – Answer the call.  
Zoom in/out – Enlarge/reduce the view.  
Send Busy – Reject the call. The calling party will hear a busy  
tone and the call will be logged as a rejected call.  
Copy number – Copy a phone number for exchange with other  
Mute – Silence the ring signal. The calling party will not  
notice that you have silenced the call. The call will be logged  
as a missed call.  
Paste number – Paste a copied number into a field  
Tap  
to make the following adjustments:  
You can also answer by voice control, see Voice control’ on  
page 55.  
Call volume – Adjust the volume in the phone. This is easier to  
do with the Jog Dial.  
Silent mode – All sound ring signals will be turned off.  
Speakerphone – Activate the P908 as a speakerphone.  
Mute microphone – Turn the microphone on or off.  
Options during or after a call  
There are several options available, depending on the situation.  
You can access some of them using the screen buttons, by  
tapping the field with the calling party details, or on the menus.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
48  
Phone  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Switch calls – Switch between the active and held call.  
Handling two or more calls  
Join calls – Join the two calls for a conference call.  
During a call, you can make a second call, or answer an  
incoming call. The ongoing call is put on hold and the new call  
becomes active. The held call is shown with a grey background.  
Transfer calls – Connect the held call to the active call and  
disconnect yourself from the call.  
Release all – End both calls.  
If someone calls when a call is on hold, you will be asked if you  
want to release the held call and answer the incoming call.  
Show contact – Display the entry in Contacts, if any, that  
corresponds to the phone number of the active call.  
When an active call is finished, you are asked to retrieve the  
held call. If you do not respond within a few seconds, the held  
call will also be finished.  
Conference calls  
A conference call can be started  
when you have an active call  
and a held call.  
P
h
o
Edit  
ne
11:03  
To make and handle a new call during a call  
1
2
3
John Smith  
(w)  
1. During a call, make a second  
call, or answer an incoming  
Tom Clark (w)  
Ann Jones (h)  
The conference call view is  
automatically displayed  
whenever a party has been  
added to the conference.  
P
h
o
ne  
E
it  
d
call.  
11:03  
2. Press  
to get a list of  
John Smith  
call handling options with  
the Flip closed. With the  
Flip open, choose options by  
tapping the screen buttons,  
by tapping the field with the  
calling party details, or  
0123456789012(h)  
End conference  
Hold conference  
Hide parties  
If an incoming call is answered  
during a conference call, the  
conference call will be put on  
hold.  
Anne Jones (w)  
End active call  
Switch calls  
Join calls  
Note Conference calls are only  
available if they are supported  
by your subscription.  
selecting from the menus.  
End active call – End the  
active call, the held call  
becomes active.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Phone  
49  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To start a conference call  
With one active call and one held call, tap the Join calls button,  
or select Phone > Join calls from the menu.  
Call list and call log  
The Call list shows calls made, received, rejected, or missed.  
The log keeps track of date, time, length, and cost information  
(if available) for each call.  
To add a new conference party  
1. During a conference call, tap  
a new call.  
on the button bar and make  
The List view of the call log shows the calls in order with the  
most recent call at the top.  
2. Select Join calls  
.
To view the Call list with the Flip closed:  
To manage a conference call  
Use the screen buttons:  
1. Press  
.
2. Select Call list  
.
End conference – End the conference for all parties.  
or  
Hold conference – Put the conference on hold. The other  
parties can still talk to each other.  
1. Select  
on the standby screen to open the Call list.  
and select which calls in the list you want to  
2. Press  
display.  
Show / Hide parties – Switch between the standard call control  
view and conference call view.  
The currently selected view is not shown in the options menu.  
Tip With the Flip closed you can press once to view the  
To speak privately to a specific conference party  
Tap a party in the list to get the following options:  
call list. Press twice to call the last number used in the P908.  
Extract party – Make the selected party the active call, the rest  
of the parties will be put on hold.  
To view the Call list with the Flip open:  
Release party – End the conference call for the selected party.  
1. In the Phone application, select  
from the button bar.  
2. Select a listed call to see more detailed information about it.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
50  
Phone  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To delete calls from the Call list  
Silent mode  
In silent mode all sound ring signals and sound alarm signals are  
To delete all calls, select Phone > Delete all calls.  
turned off. When the Flip is closed, press  
and select Turn  
To delete old calls, select Phone > Delete entries older than >  
Enter a date > Delete  
on silent to put the phone in silent mode. Press  
and select  
Turn off silent to turn off silent mode. When the Flip is open, tap  
the sounds icon in the status bar to open a dialogue where you  
can switch silent mode on or off.  
To delete one call, open the detailed view on the call > Phone  
> Delete this entry.  
The vibrating alert still works in silent mode if not deactivated.  
Hints and smart functions  
Set up speed dial numbers  
Speed dial is a fast way to call one of nine selected phone  
numbers. The view contains nine speed dial positions. Each  
speed dial entry consists of a picture or an icon, and a name or a  
number. The names, numbers and pictures shown in the Speed  
dial view are derived from the Contacts application, see  
‘Contacts’ on page 99. If the contact has a picture stored then  
this picture is used. A default icon is used if the contact does not  
have a stored picture.  
Speakerphone  
If you open the Flip during a call, the speakerphone function is  
activated and the volume will increase. This lets you continue  
the conversation while using other functions of the P908.  
Close the Flip or tap  
to switch off the speakerphone.  
Note The speakerphone does not work while the phone is in  
silent mode.  
To set a Speed dial number  
Warning! The volume may be uncomfortably loud at the  
higher volume levels if the phone is close to your ear. Exposure  
to excessive volume may damage hearing.  
1. Select  
from the button bar.  
2. Select an empty position.  
3. Select the desired contact.  
4. Select Done  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Phone  
51  
           
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To edit or delete a Speed dial number  
1. Select , on the button bar.  
To use the Power menu  
The Power menu has the following options:  
2. Select Edit > Edit speed dial  
.
Phone on – Start the P908 in the normal way.  
Flight mode – Start the P908 in flight mode.  
Power off – Turn the P908 off.  
3. Select the contact to edit or delete.  
4. To change the name, enter the new name.  
To delete a contact, tap Delete.  
To set flight mode on and off when Power menu is selected  
1. Press the On/Off button.  
5. Select Done  
.
2. On the Power menu, select the option you want.  
Flight mode  
3. Press the Jog Dial,  
, or tap Done.  
In flight mode the radio function is turned off so that it does not  
disturb sensitive equipment, for instance in an aeroplane or in a  
hospital. You cannot make and receive calls, but most of the  
other functions in the P908 are available.  
To set flight mode on or off  
1. Select Control panel > Device > Flight mode.  
2. Select Flight mode now / Phone on now  
3. Tap Done  
.
Note The phone and other communication functions must never  
be used in an aircraft unless otherwise instructed by the aircraft  
personnel. If the use of equipment without a radio transmitter is  
permitted, you can turn on the flight mode on the product. Doing  
so turns off the radio function.  
.
Controlling tone-based services  
You can use your P908 to control phone banking services or  
other tone-based services that use DTMF (Dual Tone Multi  
Frequency).  
You can set a ‘Power menu’ to ask you if you want to start the  
P908 in normal mode or flight mode each time you turn on the  
P908. See ‘Flight mode’ on page 148 on how to activate this  
function.  
The P908 provides different ways of sending tones during a call:  
Pressing keypad keys during an active call.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
52  
Phone  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Including a tone sequence in the call setup. After the phone  
Support for TTY  
Teletype (TTY) accessory, text phone, is an aid for people with  
speech impairments.  
number, but before the digits, press and hold  
to insert  
a pause, represented by the character . Then press your  
p
digits. Finally make the call by pressing  
.
Program digit sequences  
into a Contact card for the  
service. Each digit  
To use the TTY device together with the P908  
1. Connect the TTY device to the accessories connector at the  
base of the P908.  
C
o
tactsEdit  
n
Unfiled  
Bank  
sequence to be sent as  
tones must begin with pc  
Once your call to the  
service has been  
2. In Phone, go to Edit > Preferences > TTY Accessory and select  
+4613244500 p1#1234567890  
p10#0#34#56789 (w)  
p30#1234#56 (w)  
.
the check box to set the P908 into TTY mode.  
Refer to the TTY device user manual to find out how to use the  
device. It may be necessary to use an adapter between the TTY  
device and the P908.  
p10#1#567890123 (w)  
p20#123456789 (w)  
established and you want  
to send one of your pre-  
programmed digit  
You can still make normal calls with the P908 in TTY mode but  
other accessories such as handsfree will not work properly.  
sequences, choose Show  
contact on the Phone menu  
to get to the Contact card  
with the tone sequences.  
Do not open the Flip during a TTY call. It will impair the quality  
of the connection.  
Note It is not advisable to  
program any personal codes  
into your P908, in case your phone is stolen or lost.  
Note Support for voice carry over (VCO) and hearing carry  
over (HCO) is handled through the TTY device and not through  
the phone.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Phone  
53  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To place calls to colleagues, use the internal extension numbers.  
Support for ALS  
When dialling an external number, you do not need to dial the  
Alternate line service (ALS) allows you to have more than one  
external line prefix; it is added automatically. Dial the  
line, and more than one phone number, to one SIM subscription.  
switchboard operator or corporate voicemail as from any other  
If you are not subscribed to ALS, these dialogues and settings  
corporate phone.  
are hidden.  
It is recommended that when storing numbers in Contacts you  
use the international number format, starting with +. This also  
allows you to use the Contact card when you do not use the  
PBX, when you are abroad, and when you are sending SMS or  
MMS messages.  
Using ALS, you can select which line to use for outgoing calls.  
You can use the first line for any function, while the second line  
can be used for speech only.  
Incoming calls can be received at both lines at any time. The  
name of the line is shown and the ring signal defined for the line  
is used.  
If you know what numbers and codes your PBX accepts, you  
can send these without the phone manipulating them. Start any  
number or command with a  
holding the key. When storing such a number on a  
Contact card, it should be stored with a leasing , and a  
command (to the PBX or for example to a phone bank) with a  
leading pc  
p. This is done by pressing and  
To select a line for outgoing calls  
The preset line is shown by the icon in the status bar. If you want  
to use the other line:  
p
With the Flip closed, press  
Switch to line 2 depending on the previously preset line.  
With the Flip open, tap and select Switch to line 1 or Switch  
to line 2 depending on the previously preset line.  
and select Switch to line 1 or  
.
When using it at home, the call will still be dialled as an internal  
call via the PBX.  
2
Note When travelling abroad, use your phone as a normal GSM  
phone, by clicking the PBX status bar icon and set the calling  
card to Off.  
Corporate phone services in P908  
The P908 can be used as a corporate phone in an Ericsson  
®
®
MD110 or Business Phone PBX, if this is equipped for  
mobile extensions.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
54  
Phone  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Incoming calls via the PBX may  
be routed to the P908 as well as  
to your fixed extension, and you  
can answer in either telephone.  
To set the phone preferences  
1. Select Phone > Edit > Preferences.  
2. Select the item to set up.  
P
h
o
ne dit  
E
02:00  
John Smith  
+442745551409 (w)  
During a call, the P908 can  
activate PBX features, such as  
making a new call, conference  
calls, inquiry calls, and call  
back.  
Incoming call picture  
PBX call  
If an incoming caller has a picture stored in contacts it will be  
shown on the screen. Select the checkbox to show a large  
version of the picture over the whole screen.  
End call  
New call  
PBX  
PBX  
PBX  
When the phone is idle, click the  
Call back  
Conference  
Voice control  
status bar PBX icon  
>
The voice control option lets you manage calls using your voice.  
With Voice answer you can use words recorded for ‘answer’ and  
‘busy’ to answer or send a busy signal to an incoming call. With  
Voice dialling, you can make a call by saying the contact’s  
name.  
Command to send other  
...  
P
B
X
commands to the PBX, such as  
In meeting until..., Course, or  
Business trip.  
Your PBX administrator controls call routing, feature buttons  
and commands in your phone via the settings file.  
Say a ‘magic word’ and then the name of the person you want to  
call, and the P908 will try to call the person. Instead of the  
magic word you can also press and hold the Jog Dial or press the  
handsfree set call button.  
Preferences  
Note Magic word is not supported with the Bluetooth headset/  
car kit in the P908. Instead of magic word, push the button on  
the Bluetooth headset. After a confirmation tone, you should say  
the name.  
In this menu you can change the settings for the phone options.  
(Settings on your P908 that are system-wide and affect more  
than one application are made from the Control panel, see  
‘Control panel’ on page 147).  
The magic word ensures that the P908 will not call somebody  
whose name has just been mentioned by chance.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Phone  
55  
           
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Voice dialling – Select or unselect the checkbox.  
You are advised to record voice commands in a quiet  
environment to maximise recognition.You also have to select  
the voice commands carefully, so it does not activate by mistake  
from environment sounds.  
Magic word – Select the cases where you want to use the  
magic word when you use voice dialling. You must,  
however, record a magic word before you can select to use it.  
Using Magic word will increase battery drain.  
To record voice commands for individual contacts, see  
Voice answer – Select or unselect the checkbox.Tap On if you  
want to answer or reject incoming calls by voice commands.  
You must first record voice commands for Answer and Busy.  
‘Creating and editing contacts’ on page 102.  
Add to contacts  
Play caller name – If you have recorded a name for a person in  
Contacts, the P908 will tell you the person’s name when he  
or she calls you. This is useful when using your P908  
together with a handsfree.  
This is a function for adding called and calling parties to  
Contacts. After a call has ended, if the phone number is not  
already stored in the Contacts, you are asked if you would like to  
add it.  
Voice commands – A list of the voice commands. A balloon  
means that a voice command is recorded for the command.  
Set the function On or Off  
.
To record a voice command  
Handsfree  
1. Select one of the options, Magic word Answer, or Busy and tap  
,
Specify how to manage calls when the P908 is used with a  
handsfree kit connected.  
Record  
.
2. Say the magic word, the answer command or the busy  
command after the tone.  
Answering mode – Select the option you want.  
Normal – Answer calls as normal.  
If you are recording a magic word, make sure that you  
choose a long unusual word, which can easily be  
distinguished from ordinary background speech.  
Any key – Press any key (except  
) on the keypad to  
answer.  
After 5 seconds – P908 answers automatically after five  
seconds.  
3. Select Play to check the quality of your recording.  
4. Select Done to exit.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
56  
Phone  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
You can also select to use a Bluetooth headset as the preferred  
sound device. See ‘Pairing’ on page 137 for information on how  
to establish connection with the headset.  
All callers – Everybody can phone you.  
Listed callers only – Only people on the Accepted callers list can  
phone you.  
Bluetooth: Preferred sound device – Select the option you want.  
Contacts – Only people in your Contacts address book can  
phone you.  
Phone – Use the keypad to manage incoming and outgoing  
calls.  
Speed dial list – Only people in your Speed dial list can phone  
Headset – Use the headset or the keypad to manage  
you.  
incoming and outgoing calls.  
No one – No one can phone you.  
Divert calls  
To add a contact to the Accepted Caller list  
You can divert incoming calls to another number if for any  
reason you are unable to answer them.  
1. Select Add new.  
2. Select Lookup and chose a contact, or write the name and  
number of the contact.  
To divert calls  
3. Select Done  
.
1. Select the type of call you want to divert.  
2. Specify the phone number you want to divert to.  
Call waiting  
Use these setting to control how P908 handles incoming calls  
during an already ongoing call.  
3. Select Done  
.
The settings are stored in the network. Tap Refresh to receive the  
current settings.  
On You will be alerted by incoming calls.  
Tip Normally the data/fax options should not be changed.  
Off – The P908 sends a busy tone to the calling party.  
Accepted callers  
You can specify who should be able to call you. All other callers  
will be rejected. Your options are:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Phone  
57  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
With the Flip open, select Phone > Call voice mail  
.
Restrict calls  
You can set restrictions for calls made from or to your P908.  
You can, for example, protect it from being used for long-  
distance calls.  
Calling cards  
Calling cards are used together with some phone services. These  
settings specify how P908 handles calling cards. Most Calling  
card settings are protected by the Device lock, see ‘Device lock’  
on page 40.  
To restrict incoming calls  
1. Select the Incoming tab.  
2. Set restrictions for:  
– All incoming calls.  
Calling card mode – Select how to use calling cards.  
Calling cards – A list of your calling cards.  
– Incoming calls when roaming. Use this to avoid costs for  
incoming calls when travelling abroad.  
Selected card – Select which of your calling cards you  
want to use.  
To restrict outgoing calls  
1. Select the Outgoing tab.  
2. Set restrictions for:  
Please consult your calling card operator for more details.  
To create a new calling card account  
Select New and enter the account information.  
– All outgoing calls.  
Access tab:  
– Outgoing international calls.  
Name – Enter a name for the calling card account.  
– Outgoing international calls except to your home country/  
region.  
Access number – Enter the phone number of the calling  
card server.  
Verification code – Enter the verification code.  
Voice mail  
International prefix – Enter the international prefix used in  
your country/region.  
For easy voicemail access, enter the number of the voicemail of  
your operator.  
Set up tab:  
With the Flip closed, press and hold  
to call this number.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
58  
Phone  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Sending order  
Number then code means that the P908 first  
1. Place the file in the Document > Unfiled area of the P908 or the  
sends the phone number you have started to call, and then  
sends the verification number. Code then number means the  
opposite order.  
Memory Stick.  
2. Select Edit > Preferences > Calling cards  
3. Tap Import  
4. Select the settings file and tap Import  
.
.
Delay for number/code – Set a time delay between the  
moment the calling card answers the call and the P908  
starts sending tones.  
.
5. Select the card among the imported cards in the Selected card  
control.  
Some international calling card services instruct their users to  
select a language by pressing a digit. When using the P908  
calling card feature, you can insert such a digit in one of these  
places:  
6. Activate the card by setting the Calling Card Mode to either  
Always use calling card or Prompt before call  
.
TTY Accessory  
Immediately after the access number, but preceded by a  
pause sign,  
Select the check box when you want to use the P908 together  
with a TTY accessory. Teletype (TTY) accessory, text phone, is  
an aid for deaf and speech-impaired people.  
p.  
In the verification code.  
In the phone number that is dialled.  
AoC - Call meter settings  
Corporate phone services  
Corporate phone services are set up using the calling cards  
setting.  
Advice of Charge allows you to keep track of the cost of calls  
and to stop the P908 from making chargeable calls when a  
certain credit limit has been exceeded. The Advice of Charge  
option only appears in the list if it is supported by your current  
subscription.  
To set up corporate phone services  
You set up corporate phone services by importing a .pbx type  
settings file. This file can be received via e-mail, stored on the  
Memory Stick or downloaded from Internet.  
If the credit is limited, a Low credit warning is displayed, when  
there is approximately thirty seconds of credit left.  
Note Make sure the file is authentic before you import it.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Phone  
59  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
When the credit runs out, Credit expired is displayed and ongoing,  
To set the line tags  
chargeable calls are stopped.  
1. Select the ALS settings dialogue.  
2. Edit the names for line 1 and 2.  
Please refer to the onboard help for detailed information about  
the Call meter settings.  
3. Tap Done  
.
Note PIN2 is required from your network operator for storing  
any changes you make to the Call meter settings.  
Not all networks provide charging information to the phone  
during a call. If your network provides this service and your  
subscription is for Advice of Charge Charging, you cannot make  
or receive any chargeable calls if you are roaming in a network  
that does not provide charging information. This restriction does  
not apply when your subscription is for Advice of Charge  
Information. You cannot change the type of subscription from  
your phone settings. Please consult your operator for more  
details.  
ALS settings  
If the user is not subscribed to ALS, these dialogues and settings  
are hidden.  
Some of the phone settings are used on a per line basis. In most  
cases, the settings displayed apply to the selected line. This is  
then indicated in the dialogue title bar. In other cases, the lines  
correspond to separate settings or tabs in the dialogues.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
60  
Phone  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
MEDIA  
CommuniCorder  
With the built-in CommuniCorder camera you can record video  
clips and take pictures, view them on your phone screen and  
send them directly to friends or colleagues via multimedia  
messaging. You can also send the video clips and pictures you  
have saved in your P908 via messaging, infrared  
communication or Bluetooth wireless technology to, for  
example, a PC. It is also possible to exchange video clips and  
pictures between the P908 and the Web.  
Still camera  
Still camera  
Outdoor  
Set for outdoor light  
Message  
picture  
Set for picture size 160x120  
pixels  
Video camera Message  
video  
Set for video clips to be  
appended to messages  
Recording video clips  
The pictures in your P908 can be set as background or they can  
be added to the contacts in your phone book. See ‘Personalizing  
your P908’ on page 144 to find out more about using pictures.  
You can record a video clip with the Flip open as well as closed.  
To record a video clip  
A button  
on the camera activates the  
1. Press the camera button  
application.  
to activate the CommuniCorder  
CommuniCorder application and acts as the  
shutter release when taking pictures.  
2. Rotate, if required, the Jog Dial to the Video mode or  
Message video if the video clip is to be sent in an MMS.  
The Jog Dial is used to set the CommuniCorder working mode:  
3. Press again to start recording. The status indicator flashes red  
during the recording.  
Video camera Video  
Automatic setting  
Still camera  
Still camera  
Still camera  
Auto  
Automatic setting  
4. Press the Jog Dial to stop recording. The video clip is  
automatically saved in Video  
.
Night  
Indoor  
Set for dark environment  
Set for indoor light  
You can also press the Jog Dial, or, when the Flip is open, tap  
the capture button  
video clip.  
at the bottom of the screen to record a  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CommuniCorder  
61  
         
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
By default the video clips you record are stored internally in the  
Delay timer  
Unfiled folder. Tap the folder menu to the right in the menu bar to  
CommuniCorder has a delay timer with a delay of 1-25 seconds.  
change the storage location to another location, for example, on  
The delay time is the time between the moment you activate the  
a Memory Stick Duo. See ‘Folders’ on page 27 for more  
shutter release and the moment when the recording starts.  
information on using folders.  
To set the delay time  
To send a video clip you have just recorded in Flip closed, select  
Send as MMS from the Flip closed context menu. In Flip open, tap  
1. Tap CommuniCorder > Preferences.  
.
2. Tap  
and set the desired delay time  
Note Most operators only accept video clips of 10 seconds  
length or 95 KB size.Use the Message video mode, or the Video  
limit setting in Video mode to limit the file size.  
To record video with delay timer  
1. Tap CommuniCorder > Delay timer.  
2. Press the camera button. The timer beeps for the set time and  
a timer icon is shown before the recording is started.  
Open the Flip to access the full range of CommuniCorder  
settings. With the Flip open, the CommuniCorder is activated by  
selecting  
>
.
When the delay timer is set, you will see the timer status icon  
. Tap CommuniCorder > Delay timer to deactivate the timer.  
To delete the last video clip  
1. Select CommuniCorder > Delete clip  
.
Video status  
2. Confirm the delete operation.  
Above the viewfinder, you will find the video status. Icons show  
whether the CommuniCorder is ready or busy, video quality, and  
audio quality. A number indicates how much time you have left.  
The calculation is based on the current settings plus available  
space on the storage location you have selected (internal or the  
Memory Stick Duo).  
To delete a video clip you have just recorded in Flip closed,  
select Delete clip from the Flip closed context menu.  
To manage video clips, tap  
to go directly to Video. See  
‘Video’ on page 69 for more information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
62  
CommuniCorder  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To view the last picture  
Taking pictures  
1. Select CommuniCorder > View picture  
.
You can take a picture with the Flip open as well as closed.  
2. Select Done to return.  
To take a picture  
To delete the last picture  
1. Press the camera button  
application.  
to activate the CommuniCorder  
1. Select CommuniCorder > Delete picture  
.
2. Select Delete to delete the picture.  
2. Rotate, if required, the Jog Dial to the desired mode.  
3. Press again to capture the image on the screen. The picture is  
To delete a picture you have just taken in Flip closed, select  
automatically saved in Pictures  
.
Delete picture from the Flip closed context menu.  
You can also press the Jog Dial, the  
Flip is open, tap the capture button  
screen to take a picture.  
button, or when the  
at the bottom of the  
To manage or edit the picture, tap  
See also ‘Pictures and Image editor’ on page 65.  
to go directly to Pictures.  
Delay timer  
By default the pictures you take are stored internally in the  
Unfiled folder. Tap the folder menu to the right in the menu bar to  
change the storage location to another location, for example, on  
a Memory Stick Duo. See ‘Folders’ on page 27 for more  
information on using folders.  
CommuniCorder has a delay timer with a delay of 1-25 seconds.  
The delay time is the time between the moment you activate the  
shutter release and the moment when the picture is taken.  
To set the delay time and the picture freeze time  
To send a picture you have just taken in Flip closed, select Send  
as MMS from the Flip closed context menu. In Flip open, tap  
1. Tap CommuniCorder > Preferences.  
.
2. Tap  
and set the desired delay time.  
Open the Flip to access the full range of CommuniCorder  
settings. With the Flip open, you activate the CommuniCorder  
In this dialogue box you can also set the picture freeze time.  
This specifies the time the picture stays unchanged in the screen  
after you have taken it.  
by selecting  
>
or pressing the camera button  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CommuniCorder  
63  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To take a picture with delay timer  
1. Select  
To change preferences for the camera  
>
.
1. Tap CommuniCorder > Preferences.  
2. Tap CommuniCorder > Delay timer.  
2. Select the setting you want to change:  
Move the slider to change the brightness of the picture.  
Move the slider to change the contrast.  
3. Press the camera button. The timer beeps for the set time and  
a timer icon is shown before the picture is taken.  
When the delay timer is set, you will see the timer status icon  
Turn the backlight On when the light behind the subject is  
brighter than the light in front of the subject.  
. Tap CommuniCorder > Delay timer to deactivate the timer.  
Turn the flicker free function On to reduce the effects of  
flicker from, for example, fluorescent light.  
Image status  
Above the viewfinder, you will find the image status. Icons  
show whether the CommuniCorder is ready or busy, delay timer  
status, picture size and picture quality. A number indicates how  
many pictures you have left. The calculation is based on the  
current settings plus available space on the storage location you  
have selected (internal or the Memory Stick Duo).  
Choose white balance according to the lighting conditions  
you are in when taking the picture.  
For pictures, choose quality and size. The picture sizes,  
640x480, 320x240 and 160x120, are displayed in pixels.  
For video, choose quality for video and audio.  
Larger size and higher quality use more memory.  
Choose delay time and freeze time for the still camera, and  
delay time and Video limit for video.  
Camera settings  
The icons in the upper right corner of the main view reflects the  
quality and size settings of the pictures and video clips and also  
the sound quality of video clips.  
You may want to change some of these settings if, for example  
you are taking a picture in daylight or in dark surroundings. You  
can also choose what resolution, size and quality, you want for  
the pictures you take.  
To restore default CommuniCorder preferences  
1. Tap CommuniCorder > Preferences  
2. Tap Default  
3. Tap Yes  
.
Note Depending on which mode you are using, some settings  
may be fixed (and not user adjustable).  
.
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
64  
CommuniCorder  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Pictures and Image editor  
In Pictures you can manage all pictures saved in your P908. The  
pictures can be taken using the CommuniCorder, received via e-  
mail, Bluetooth wireless technology or infrared communication,  
downloaded via the browser or transferred from your PC via a  
cable. Your P908 supports JPEG, GIF, PNG, WBMP and BMP  
picture formats. In the Image editor you can perform basic  
editing of your pictures.  
Change between a thumbnail view and a list view of the pictures  
by tapping or  
.
At the bottom of the screen you can see how many pictures you  
have saved in your P908.  
Tip To take a new picture, tap  
to go to the CommuniCorder  
.
To sort the pictures  
Tap Edit to choose how to sort the pictures in your folders.  
Pictures  
P
i
c
t
uresEdit  
All  
Detail view  
Tap a picture to go to the detail  
view.  
The pictures can be sent in  
multimedia messages, added to  
the contacts in your phone book,  
or used as a background image  
and screensaver.  
Pictures Edit  
Photos  
In the detail view, you can rename  
your pictures and sort them into  
folders. This makes it easier for  
you to keep track of your pictures.  
Brioney  
Mer de gla...  
Thumbnail view  
The thumbnail view gives an  
overview of all the pictures in  
your P908. You can search for  
specific pictures and sort your  
pictures by name, date, size or  
type.  
To rename a picture  
Wakeboard  
Mont Blanc  
1. Select Pictures > Rename picture  
.
12 pictures (890Kb)  
2. Enter a picture name > Done  
.
JPG-0002  
10:15am,21/06/04  
Note Two or more pictures  
cannot have the same name.  
Move between the pictures with the arrow buttons or Jog Dial.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pictures and Image editor  
65  
         
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Tip Use the Folder function to organise your pictures. Read  
more about organising files in ‘Folders’ on page 27.  
Tap  
to zoom in.  
Tap and drag the zoomed picture to view specific details in  
the picture.  
At the bottom of the screen you can see the picture information,  
for example, the size of the picture and the date the picture was  
taken.  
Tap  
to zoom out.  
Select Edit > Preferences and specify the picture orientation in  
widescreen.  
‘Actual size’ means each pixel of the image is displayed on one  
pixel of the screen, so a 640x480 image will be displayed with  
scroll bars as it is larger than the display area.  
Tap a picture to display it over the whole screen. Tap it again  
to go back.  
Rotate the Jog Dial to browse the pictures in widescreen and  
Use  
and  
or the Jog Dial to move between the pictures in  
takes you back to the thumbnail or list  
the current folder.  
view.  
Deleting, moving, and copying  
Sending and receiving pictures  
From the detail view of the picture you can:  
You can send pictures to other phones or to a PC via multimedia  
messaging, IR or Bluetooth – use Pictures > Send as. See  
‘Sending and receiving items’ on page 29. You can also save  
pictures that you have received via e-mail and in multimedia  
messages. See ‘Incoming multimedia messages’ on page 90 and  
‘Receiving attachments’ on page 95.  
Select Pictures > Delete picture to delete it.  
Select Pictures > Copy picture to copy the picture to a clipboard  
so that you can paste it into an item in another application.  
Select Pictures > Copy to to copy the picture to another folder  
(internal or on a Memory Stick Duo). See ‘Folders’ on  
page 27 for more information.  
Note Pictures with Forward lock can not be sent further.  
Use the folders menu to move a picture to another folder  
(internal or on a Memory Stick Duo). See ‘Folders’ on  
page 27 for more information.  
Zooming pictures, widescreen and full  
screen  
From the detail view of the picture you can:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
66  
Pictures and Image editor  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To copy, delete or move multiple pictures  
Editing pictures  
In the thumbnail and list views, select the pictures you want  
to delete, move or copy, by selecting the check boxes beside  
the picture names. Then select Pictures > the command you  
want.  
Editing is controlled from the toolbar below the picture. Tapping  
the tool icons will bring up a palette with choices:  
Zoom in  
Zoom out  
To delete you can also use the Storage Manager found in the  
Control panel. For more information, refer to ‘Folders’ on  
page 27.  
Select colour Select one of the 16 colours  
Select pen  
Select one of the 4 pen sizes  
Select  
Select one of the tools:  
Image editor  
drawing tool - Pen for freehand drawing  
- Undo last action  
Using the Image editor, you  
can edit your pictures.  
- Undo all actions  
- Add text  
Image editor Edit  
- Crop picture  
- Resize picture  
You can crop and resize the  
pictures. You can also rotate  
the pictures by 90° at a time.  
You can also write and draw  
on them, using different  
colours.  
Select rotation Select rotation – clockwise or  
anti-clockwise  
You can save the edited image by selecting Image editor > Done  
.
You can copy and paste by selecting Edit > Copy and Edit > Paste  
You can only copy and paste whole pictures.  
.
To start the Image editor  
From a picture opened in  
Pictures, select Edit > Edit  
If you make an error when editing the picture, you can undo the  
last by Edit > Undo. You can also undo all actions since the  
picture  
.
picture was saved, by selecting Edit > Undo all  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pictures and Image editor  
67  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To zoom in and out  
Note As soon as you tap outside the text item, the text is merged  
with the picture and cannot be edited or moved.  
Tap  
to zoom in.  
Tap and drag the zoomed picture to view specific details in  
the picture.  
To crop a picture  
1. Tap  
and select the cropping tool  
.
Tap  
to zoom out.  
A frame with 8 handles is placed around the picture.  
Select Edit > Zoom, and select between Fit to screen and Full  
2. Tap and drag one of the handles to define how the picture  
should be cropped.  
size  
.
3. Tap anywhere, except on the handles, to crop the picture.  
To draw on a picture  
1. If desired, tap  
2. If desired, tap  
and select the desired colour.  
To resize a picture  
and select the desired pen size.  
and select the pen tool .  
1. Tap  
and select the resizing tool  
.
A frame with 4 handles is placed around the picture.  
3. Tap  
2. Tap and drag one of the handles to define the new size of the  
picture.  
4. Draw with the stylus on the picture.  
When you lift the stylus, the picture will be resized.  
To add text to a picture  
1. Tap  
and select the text tool  
.
Sony Image Station  
2. Tap the place where the text should be put on the picture.  
3. Enter the text in the text field.  
You can exchange pictures between your P908 and Sony Image  
Station on the Web. Use the browser in your P908 to go to the  
relevant Internet site and sign up:  
4. If required, change the text properties, using the choices on  
the text, style and colours tabs.  
For Europe: http://www.sonystyle-imaging.com  
For Japan: http://www.imagestation.jp  
For USA: http://www.imagestation.com  
5. Tap Done to place the text on the picture.  
You can move the text on the picture by tapping and dragging  
on the text.  
You can return to the text editor by tapping on the text item.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
68  
Pictures and Image editor  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Video  
You can play video content that is recorded with the  
CommuniCorder, stored in your P908 or streamed. You can also  
play audio-only material which is encapsulated within an MPEG  
Video clips  
A video clip is a short video sequence.  
file or streamed. You can download video clips from an Internet  
site or transfer from a PC via a cable, or from a Memory Stick  
Duo. You can also exchange video clips with other phones or  
PCs via infrared communication, Bluetooth wireless technology  
or multimedia messaging.  
Playing video clips  
The Video player opens in the list view. In this view, you get an  
overview of all the MPEG-4 video clips in your P908. You can  
search for specific video clips, zoom the video clip names and  
sort them by name, date, or size. At the bottom of the screen you  
can see how many video clips you have saved in your P908.  
You do not have to download a complete video clip to be able to  
view it. You can use the streaming function and view the video  
clip from the Web site where it is located. The video clip is  
played with only a short time delay.  
To view a video clip  
Select  
>
Video.  
The video player supports files in the MPEG-4 file format, for  
example name.mp4.  
3. Select a video clip in the list.  
Warning! The volume may be uncomfortably loud at the  
higher volume levels if the phone is close to your ear, or if you  
are using the stereo headset. Exposure to excessive volume  
levels may damage hearing.  
You can store video clips both internally and externally. You can  
also copy them between the internal memory and the Memory  
Stick Duo. See ‘Folders’ on page 27.  
To adjust the volume  
Rotate the Jog Dial up to increase the volume, and down to  
decrease the volume.  
While a video clip plays, tap the screen to display the video clip  
in widescreen. Tap the screen again to go back. Specify the  
screen orientation in Edit > Preferences > Display  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Video  
69  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To copy, delete or move multiple video clips  
In this view you can send,  
rename, delete or move your  
video clips. Only the video  
clips saved in your P908 or  
on the Memory Stick Duo  
(that is not streamed) can be  
handled in the detail view.  
In the list view, select the video clips you want to delete,  
move or copy, by selecting the check boxes beside the picture  
names. Then select Video > the command you want.  
V
i
d
e
o E
d
i
t
Sports  
Diving in the ocean  
To delete you can also use the Storage manager found in the  
Control panel. For more information, refer to ‘Folders’ on  
page 27.  
To rename a video clip  
To sort the video clips  
Select Edit and choose how you want to sort the video clips in  
the current folder.  
1. Select Video > Rename clip  
.
2. Enter a video clip name  
>
Done  
.
To record a clip using the CommuniCorder  
Two or more video clips  
cannot have the same  
name.  
Press the camera button  
CommuniCorder application.  
view.  
or select  
to activate the  
Playing  
0:09  
takes you back to the list  
Tip Use the Folder function to  
organise all your video clips.  
Managing video clips  
To copy the current video clip to another folder, select Video >  
Copy to, then select a folder from the list.  
The detail view is intended for managing one clip at a time. You  
can play and pause the clip by tapping and , and stop by  
tapping  
.
To view the video clip information  
Select Video > Info  
.
The slider under the video area shows the current play position  
within the clip. Tap and drag the slider to move to another  
position.  
To delete a video clip  
1. Select the video clip you want to delete.  
2. Select Video > Delete clip  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
70  
Video  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
The data in the file is divided into small packets that are sent in a  
Saving video clips  
continuous flow, a stream.You can then begin viewing the file  
When you play video clips that you have received via e-mail or  
from the beginning as the rest of the packets are sent. The short  
multimedia messaging, or that you have downloaded to your  
delay at the start is to enable a small amount of data to be  
P908 from the Web, the viewer detail view is automatically  
buffered.  
launched. From the viewer detail view you can then save the  
video clip to your P908.  
Your P908 can receive streaming multimedia.  
To save a video clip from another application  
Applications  
1. Select the video clip you want to save.  
Streaming applications can be classified into on-demand and  
live applications.  
2. Select Video > Save clip  
.
3. Select the folder you want to save the video clip in > Save  
.
Examples of on-demand applications are:  
Streaming of music.  
Sending and receiving video clips  
You can send and receive video clips using Video > Send as. See  
‘Sending and receiving items’ on page 29.  
Streaming of news (video and audio).  
Streaming of movie trailers.  
Streaming and download of video.  
Live streaming of music or video (broadcast).  
Streaming  
Streaming is a data transfer method making multimedia  
available in real-time. You can, for example, listen to audio and  
watch video almost at the same time as it is sent.  
How to connect to a streaming service  
If you know the URL of the streaming service:  
1. Select Video > Open location  
.
2. Enter the URL of the streaming service, or select a service  
from the drop-down list.  
3. Tap Done  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Video  
71  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
If you do not know the URL of the streaming service:  
3. Select Custom setting and move the slider left or right > Done.  
1. Open Internet and browse to the site where the service is.  
When you download a video clip to your P908, it is saved in the  
download cache memory. When this memory is full, you have to  
empty it to be able to download new video clips to your P908.  
2. Select the item you want to play, for example a video.  
The site server will download part of the video to the P908  
buffer memory. This will take a short while. When the buffer  
memory is filled, the Video player will open the detail view,  
described above, and play the video seamlessly.  
To clear the download cache  
1. Select Edit > Preferences  
.
2. Select the Buffering tab.  
3. Select Clear cache > Done  
.
Preferences  
When you view a video clip from a Web site, you may have to  
set the proxy settings.  
When you view a video clip in full screen mode, you can select  
the orientation of the picture  
To change the proxy settings  
To change the orientation of the picture in full screen mode  
1. Select Edit > Preferences  
.
1. Select Edit > Preferences  
.
2. Select the Proxy tab.  
2. Select the Display tab.  
If the proxy settings set in the control panel are to be used,  
3. Tap Left-handed or Right-handed orientation > Done  
.
tap Automatic configuration  
.
When you view a video clip from a Web site, using the  
streaming function, a media buffer is used to provide a steady  
flow of data. Increasing the size of the media buffer may  
improve the play-back of the video clip.  
If the manual settings are to be used, enter the relevant  
information.  
To change the media buffer size  
1. Select Edit > Preferences  
.
2. Select the Buffering tab.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
72  
Video  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Music player  
Your P908 has mobile music in the form of a stereo music  
player. With the music player you can listen to single music  
tracks or entire folders with tracks. You can download tracks to  
your P908 from a PC, the Internet or Memory Stick Duo, and  
create different folders with tracks. Your P908 supports a  
number of different sound files, including the popular MP3  
format. See ‘Technical data’ on page 194 for more information  
on supported file types.  
If you navigate to the standby screen while you play music, you  
can press to pause. Press it again to play.  
If you launch another application the music will still play. If this  
application requires dedicated audio, the playback will be  
paused.  
Jog Dial control  
Rotate the Jog Dial to select a sound track. Press it inwards to  
play. Press it again to stop.  
You can store sound files both internally and on the Memory  
Stick Duo. You can also copy them between the internal  
memory and the Memory Stick Duo. See ‘Folders’ on page 27.  
To adjust the volume  
Rotate the Jog Dial up to increase the volume, and down to  
decrease the volume.  
When you receive a phone call while listening, the playback will  
be paused. When you end the call, you must navigate back to the  
Music application to restart playing.  
Warning! The volume may be uncomfortably loud at the  
higher volume levels if the phone is close to your ear, or if you  
are using the stereo headset. Exposure to excessive volume  
levels may damage hearing.  
Tip To listen to more music you can store music on several  
Memory Stick Duos and carry them with you.  
Playing sound files  
You can play MP3 music both in Flip closed and in Flip open. In  
Flip closed, with the Jog Dial, select  
select the track you want to play. Press  
commands.  
, select Music player, and  
to find other  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Music player  
73  
         
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To play a list randomly  
Track-folder view  
Select Music > Random  
.
This view is intended for  
playing entire folders with  
MP3 files. In the track-folder  
Music Edit  
All  
Sony Ericsson  
Managing sound files  
view you can  
Play,  
Pause, and  
Stop the  
0:00/3:35  
playback of the current folder,  
and see the duration of the  
track. Selecting a track and  
File list view  
In the file list view you can  
see how many tracks you  
have in the current folder.  
Tapping a file name will open  
the detail view, and allow you  
to play and manage that file.  
Music Edit  
All  
Aeroplane  
tapping  
will play the  
Aeroplane  
Beautiful Night  
Rooster  
Song for you  
Sony Ericsson theme  
Standing Still  
Beautiful Night  
Rooster  
selected track and all the  
following tracks in the folder.  
Use the slider to move  
forwards and backwards in  
the track. Select Music >  
Manage tracks to move to the  
file list view.  
Song for you  
Sony Ericsson theme  
Standing Still  
Stuck with You...  
Walk on  
To copy, delete or move  
multiple files, select the files  
you want to delete, move or  
copy, by selecting the check  
boxes beside the file names.  
Then select Music > the  
Loop and random  
With the loop function you can decide if you want to listen to  
the tracks in the current folder only once, or if you want to loop  
them until you manually stop the play-back. Select the random  
function to play the tracks randomly.  
command you want.  
8 tracks (6806 KB)  
To delete you can also use the  
Storage manager found in the  
Control panel. For more information, refer to ‘Folders’ on  
page 27.  
To loop a list  
Select Music > Loop  
.
Tap  
to move directly to the track-folder view.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
74  
Music player  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To delete a track from the P908  
Detail view  
1. Select Music > Delete track  
.
The detail view is intended for managing one file at a time. Tap  
a file name to open the detail view. You can also play and pause  
2. Select Yes  
.
the file by tapping  
and  
.
Viewer  
In the detail view you can move tracks between your different  
folders using the folder function, or rename or delete them.  
If you play sound tracks remotely, for example music on an  
Internet site, a view similar to the Detail view displays. The  
commands you find in this view are similar to those in the Detail  
view.  
The detail view displays the  
name of the track, the artist’s  
name, the album title, the  
track number, the copyright  
year, the sound file type and  
the duration of the track.  
Music Edit  
Aeroplane  
Artist:  
Unfiled  
Managing track folders  
In the track-folder view, the Music player plays the MP3 files of  
the selected folder. (With one exception, the All folder. If you  
select this folder, all MP3 files in all music folders will be  
played.) Using the folder function you can create new folders  
for sound tracks. You can create folders on the Memory Stick  
Duo. You can also use several Memory Stick Duos for your  
music, for example.  
Album:  
Note The amount of  
information displayed  
depends on how much  
information is available on  
the sound file.  
Filename:  
Aeroplane  
Date and Size:  
6:02pm, 21/06/04  
2107KB  
Duration:  
3:35  
Move between the tracks in  
the current folder using the  
In any Music player view, you can create a new folder using the  
Edit Folders command in the folder menu. Then you move or  
copy your sound files to the new folder. You can add more  
folders with sounds as long as there is memory available. You  
can also sort the files using commands in the Edit menu.  
0:00  
and  
buttons.  
To rename a track  
1. Select Music > Rename track  
.
2. Enter a track name and tap Done  
.
Two or more tracks cannot have the same name.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Music player  
75  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Note You can send WAV and AMR sound files in multimedia  
messages, and MP3 and AU sound files as attachments to  
multimedia messages.  
Preferences  
You can choose if you want all types of sound files to be  
displayed in the file list view, or if you want to display only a  
certain type of sound file.  
To select sound file types  
1. Select Edit > Preferences from the file list view.  
2. Check the boxes next to the sound files you want to include  
in the track folders and tap Done  
.
Saving sound files  
When you receive sound files in other applications, such as  
e-mail and multimedia messages, you activate the viewer in  
your P908. From the viewer you can then save the sound file  
to your P908.  
To save a track from another application  
1. Tap the save (floppy disk) icon or select Music and tap Save  
.
2. Select the folder you want to save the track in and tap Save  
.
Sending and receiving sound files  
You can send and receive sound files using Send as. See  
‘Sending and receiving items’ on page 29.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
76  
Music player  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Internet  
You use  
Internet, the P908 browser, to:  
services it might be necessary to set up a WAP account in the  
Control panel as well. See ‘Getting started with Internet and  
Messages’ on page 171.  
Connect to the Internet to view and access Web and WAP  
pages.  
Receive and view Push messages from your WAP service  
provider.  
To start the browser  
Start the browser by:  
Download Java applications, images and audio.  
– pressing the Internet button.  
– selecting  
– selecting  
in the application picker.  
in the application launcher  
The browser can open Web pages that use Java script or frames,  
but functions that use Java script in the Web page will not work  
properly.  
.
– selecting a URL in another application.  
You can save bookmarks to viewed pages, to be able to access  
them easily. You can also save pages in the P908 for off-line  
viewing.  
Note If required, you have to enter your username and  
password to log in to your Internet account.  
While opening a page, the P908 might not receive incoming  
calls. However, when the page is properly opened you can  
receive a call and the page will still be open.  
The browser uses folders for categorising information. The  
folders used are bookmarks, saved pages, signed documents,  
and Push messages.  
The application has two views:  
Push messages is a service that gives you notifications about, for  
example, weather forecasts, sport results, and stock quotes. The  
notification is sent to you as a message that contains a WAP link  
to the site with the information you subscribe to.  
Browser view The base view of the application, where you can  
view Web and WAP pages.  
Bookmarks  
view  
A list view where you can save shortcuts:  
• to Web and WAP sites on the Internet  
• to locally stored pages  
Before you can use Internet, you need to set up an Internet  
• to documents digitally signed by you.  
account in the Control panel. If you intend to use certain WAP  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Internet  
77  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Browser view options  
Using the browser view  
Internet menu  
The P908 can display  
the Internet page in  
normal view or full  
screen view. Use the  
Internet button to  
Open page – Enter the URL, or select from the drop-down  
list.  
0:03  
K
J
Add to bookmarks – Enter the name of the bookmark and  
select the folder to save it in.  
A
B
I
n
te  
r
ne  
t
E
dit  
change between the  
views. In full screen  
view, press the Jog Dial  
short forward to  
Save page – Enter the name of the page and select the  
folder to save it in.  
Send as – Send the current URL via text or multimedia  
message, e-mail, Infrared, or Bluetooth wireless  
technology.  
display a menu with the  
most frequently used  
commands.  
Find – Enter text and search for the text in the page.  
H
G
C
Sony Ericsson  
Find next – Search for the next occurrence of the search  
D
E
text.  
Scan text – Go to the area populated with the greatest  
A
B
C
D
E
F
Internet menu.  
amount of text.  
Edit menu.  
Reload page – Reload the page.  
Go to the next page.  
Go to the previous page.  
F
Load all images – Load all images of the page.  
Page information – Show the page information.  
Bookmarks – Open the bookmark view.  
Shift between the browser view and the bookmarks view.  
Disconnect or get information about the connection.  
Go to the home page.  
G
H
J
Edit menu  
Stop loading the page.  
Cut – Cut out the marked information from an input field.  
A secure connection is established.  
Progress bar, shows the loading progress.  
Copy – Copy the marked information.  
K
Copy all – Copy all information on the page.  
Paste – Paste the copied text into the selected field.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78  
Internet  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Full screen – Expand the browser view.  
Zoom – Select zoom level: Small, Medium or Large.  
Preferences – Set the preferences of the browser.  
Help – View help on Internet.  
Scan text function – Press the Jog Dial inwards to scan the  
page for text. The screen will navigate to the area  
populated with the greatest amount of text. Repeat the  
operation to find the next most populated area.  
Context-sensitive menus  
Internet button  
The context-sensitive menu is opened when you keep the stylus  
pressed on a link or a picture.  
Full screen – When you have opened an Internet page,  
press the Internet button to display the page in full screen.  
Text link and picture link  
Normal browser view – Press the Internet button again to go  
back.  
Open link – Open the active link.  
Link information – Show information on the link.  
Handles on the screen – The browser will outline a Web page  
as you are used to seeing it on your PC. Use the handles on  
the screen to scroll:  
Add to bookmarks – Add the active link URL to the  
bookmark list.  
Scroll up and down – Tap the handle to the right of the  
Loaded picture (with or without link)  
screen and drag it up or down.  
Save image – Save the picture in the P908.  
Scroll left and right – Tap the handle at the bottom of the  
screen and drag it to the left or to the right.  
Copy image – Copy the picture to the clipboard.  
View image – View the picture adapted to the screen  
Jog Dial  
(enlarged or reduced).  
Scroll up and down – When you have opened an Internet  
page, rotate the Jog Dial to scroll up and down.  
Send image as – Send the picture as text or multimedia  
message, e-mail, infrared, or Bluetooth wireless  
technology.  
Short forward – In Normal view, change between the  
Internet and the Edit menus. In full screen view, show a  
menu with the most frequently used commands.  
Not loaded picture (with or without link)  
Load image – Load the picture.  
Voice call link  
Call – Place a call according to the link.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Internet  
79  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
New SMS – Send an SMS message according to the link.  
New MMS – Send an MMS message according to the link.  
New contact – Create a contact with the link information.  
To save a page for off-line browsing  
1. Select Internet > Save page  
.
2. Change the page name, if required, and select a folder to save  
it in.  
Mail to link  
3. Select Done.  
New e-mail – Send an e-mail according to the link.  
New MMS – Send an MMS message according to the link.  
To create a bookmark to the open page  
New contact – Create a contact with the link information.  
1. Select Internet > Add to bookmarks.  
Icons within a page  
Picture not loaded (can be loaded manually).  
2. Change the bookmark name, if required, and select a folder  
to save it in.  
3. Select Done.  
Damaged picture (not possible to load).  
Note If images are not loaded, select the picture icons  
To download and upload files, for example, applications  
or select Internet > Load all images.  
When you select a link to a downloadable file, for example,  
applications, images and so on, information on the file is  
displayed.  
To open a specific Web page  
1. Select Internet > Open page.  
Select Yes to start the download.  
2. Enter the page URL or select a previously viewed page from  
the drop-down list.  
When you select a link for uploading a file, a form for  
submitting the file is displayed.  
3. Select Open.  
Select the file and select Yes to start the upload.  
To navigate through recently opened pages  
To view information on the open page  
1. Select Internet > Page information.  
1. Select  
2. Select  
to move back to previously viewed pages.  
to move forwards again.  
2. Select the Content tab to view the page information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
80  
Internet  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
3. Select the Connection tab to view information on the  
User authentication request  
connection.  
Whenever a user authentication is requested, you have the  
possibility either to select a certificate and confirm the user  
authentication, to select to continue anonymously or to cancel  
the connection.  
4. Select the Certificates button to view the information on:  
– Server  
– User  
If Connect anonymously has been set, the browser will instead  
automatically try to connect anonymously.  
To disconnect from the Internet  
1. Select the connection icon (HSCSD/CSD  
in the status bar.  
or GPRS  
)
Using the bookmark view  
2. Select Disconnect from the pop-up menu  
3. The dialogue Do you want to disconnect, Yes/No appears.  
4. Select Yes  
A
A
B
C
D
Folder menu.  
Edit menu.  
.
B
C
I
n
te  
r
ne  
t
E
dit  
All  
WIM Access  
Internet menu.  
Search Internet  
My home page  
SonyEricsson  
News  
When the browser requires access to the WIM card, for  
example, when establishing a secure connection, you have to  
enter the correct PIN. For more information, please contact your  
service provider or IT department.  
D
E
Select an icon to view  
information on the  
bookmark.  
Webmail  
E
Checked bookmarks  
can be deleted from  
the Internet menu.  
Project home  
711 time table  
CSS fonts  
Signing documents  
You have to enter the signing PIN each time a signing operation  
is going to be performed.  
F
Select the bookmark  
text to open the page.  
F
G
H
Select to go to the  
home page.  
G
Shift between browser  
and bookmarks views.  
H
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Internet  
81  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Bookmark view options  
Icons  
Bookmark  
Internet menu  
Open page – Enter the URL, or select from the drop-down  
list.  
Saved page  
Push message from the WAP service provider  
Signed document  
New bookmark – Enter the URL, the name of the bookmark  
and select the folder to save it in.  
Delete – Delete the selected bookmark.  
To open a bookmark  
Edit menu  
1. Select the bookmark text.  
2. The bookmarked item is opened.  
Edit – Edit the selected bookmark.  
Sort by date / name – Sort the entries. (Available for Push  
messages and Signed documents only.)  
To view bookmark information  
Zoom – Select zoom level: Small, Medium or Large.  
Preferences – Set the preferences of the browser.  
Help – Open the help for Internet.  
1. Select the check box of the preferred bookmark.  
2. Select Edit > Edit  
.
Information on the bookmark is shown. From the  
information screen you can:  
Folders menu  
All – Show all contacts in the list.  
– Edit the bookmark.  
Bookmarks – Show all bookmarks.  
– Delete the bookmark.  
Saved pages – Show all saved pages.  
– Send the bookmark as e-mail, SMS message, Bluetooth  
wireless technology, infrared, or MMS message.  
Unfiled – Show the bookmarks that are not in a folder.  
Edit folders – Categorise your contacts in folders (business,  
personal and so on).  
To delete several bookmarks  
1. Select the check box of the bookmarks to delete.  
2. Select Internet > Delete.  
The contents in the Folders menu can change depending on the  
pages and bookmarks stored in the P908.  
3. Select Yes to confirm.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
82  
Internet  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
– Select the WAP account to be used when the home page is  
Preferences  
loaded. The accounts are set up in the control panel.  
The browser is initially set up to work, but you have to set up  
– Select if a new page should be displayed over the whole  
your own account.  
screen.  
The easiest way to set up Internet and WAP accounts is to ask  
your Internet service provider to send you an auto setup message  
containing the required setup information. The accounts will  
then be set up automatically on your P908. To guarantee the  
integrity of the settings, a PIN may be used.  
– Select if you want to use a vertical scroll bar to scroll the  
pages up and down. Otherwise you can use the Jog Dial.  
– Select if images should be loaded. If images are not  
loaded, the page will be loaded faster. Non-loaded images  
can be loaded manually when viewing the page.  
– Select if sounds should be played when the page is  
opened.  
For security reasons, some WAP pages and services, for  
example on-line banking, can only be accessed from a particular  
WAP account. See ‘WAP accounts’ on page 164 for more  
information.  
– Select if animations should be played when the page is  
opened.  
Note Proxy settings for MMS messages, and for a WAP gateway  
should be set in the WAP accounts. Other proxy settings should  
be set in the Internet accounts.  
Security settings  
– Select if you want to save signed documents.  
– Select if you want to connect without giving away your  
identity.  
To set up the browser  
– Select if you want to connect using the WIM card.  
– Select if you want to allow cookies.  
1. Select Edit > Preferences  
.
2. Perform the setup according to the following:  
Advanced settings  
Basic settings  
– Select if you want to be able to receive messages from  
your WAP service provider.  
– Enter the URL for the page to be shown when the browser  
is started from the Internet button; either a page stored in  
the P908 or a page on the Internet.  
– Select if you want to automatically open the URL in WAP  
Push messages.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Internet  
83  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
– Select if you want to remove out-of-date messages  
automatically.  
– Select a sound that notifies you when a Push message  
arrives.  
– Set the size of the cache memory. The cache is the part of  
the memory where viewed pages are stored. Stored pages  
will load faster when you visit them again.  
– Select Clear history to empty the list of pages visited and  
cookies stored.  
– Select Clear cache to empty the cache memory.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
84  
Internet  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Games  
There are two pre-installed games in your P908. Traditional  
Played – Select if you want to play locally against your  
Chess and the card game Solitaire.  
P908 or against another P908 user.  
More games are available on the Multimedia for P908 CD in your  
original P908 box. You can also install games from other  
developers, see ‘Installing applications’ on page 132.  
3. Tap Play to start the game.  
To play Chess  
1. Select the piece you want to move.  
The square where it is standing will now be marked with an  
triangle.  
Chess  
You can play Chess against the P908, or against another P908  
user via SMS.  
2. Select the square to which you want to move the piece and  
piece will move to it.  
Please read the help texts for detailed information on how to set  
up and play Chess.  
Closing the Flip closes the game temporarily and saves the  
session status. Your opponent will be sent an end-of-game text  
message.  
To start a new game  
1. Select Chess > New game to initiate a game.  
Solitaire  
2. Enter details as desired in the New game dialogue. You can  
return to these details later.  
Solitaire is a card game played with a standard deck of 52 cards  
and up to 4 Jokers.  
Name – Give the game a name so you can return to it later  
if you have to interrupt it.  
The purpose of Solitaire is to remove all the cards from the piles  
to the layout card whilst scoring as many points as possible.  
Notes – Write a note about the game.  
You play – Choose to play white or black.  
Against – Select the level of your opponent.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Games  
85  
           
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Points are awarded for playing pile cards and bonus points are  
awarded for unbroken, ascending or descending runs of four or  
more rank cards.  
The game will either start with a new game or with the layout  
for an earlier, interrupted game. (The game data is saved on  
return to desktop, when the Flip is closed or when the battery  
is low.)  
When you cannot play any more cards and cards still remain in  
the piles, the game is over. If all the pile cards are removed,  
bonus points are awarded and the hand is won. You are then  
challenged to play a Higher/Lower game to acquire more bonus  
points. After the challenge, the game continues and a new hand  
is dealt with one less Joker.  
2. Select the card you want to move and it will be higlighted.  
3. Select the card to which you would like to move the  
higlighted card.  
To restart the game during a game  
Select Solitaire > New game.  
Rules  
To undo/redo a move  
Select Edit > Undo move / Redo move.  
When the game starts, 35 cards are dealt from the deck into  
7 piles of 5 cards. A further card is then dealt face up from the  
layout card.  
Cards can only be played from the bottom of the piles.  
To play a pile card it must have a face value of one more or  
one less than the layout card.  
Aces are low and may not be played onto kings. Jokers can  
be played onto any card and any card can be played onto a  
joker.  
Play Solitaire  
Solitaire is only available with the Flip open.  
1. Select the icon for Solitaire.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
86  
Games  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
BUSINESS  
Messages  
With  
Messages you can create, send, and receive different  
– E-mail notifications.  
types of messages:  
– Files for exchanging electronic business cards (vCard)  
and calendar information (vCal).  
SMS (Short Message Service) messages are text  
messages sent and received via the network operator's  
message centre. When a text message has pictures,  
sounds, melodies and animations inserted, it becomes  
an EMS (Enhanced Message Service).  
Auto setup files for OTA (Over The Air) configuration.  
Beamed messages. These are files received via infrared or  
Bluetooth wireless technology.  
The different types of messages are handled by separate  
messaging accounts. Select  
Messaging accounts to see the details of the messaging accounts  
MMS (Multimedia Message Service) messages.  
A multimedia message can contain text, graphics,  
animations, photographic images, audio clips and ring  
melodies.  
Control panel > Connections >  
on your P908.  
E-mail messages. Your P908’s mail client supports  
POP3 and IMAP4 mail servers, MIME attachments and  
SMTP for sending mail.  
You can have any number of e-mail accounts - a typical  
configuration will be one business and one personal account.  
When you set up a synchronization with your PC, an account for  
synchronized e-mails is automatically created on your P908.  
You also use Messages to receive:  
Area Information messages.These are text messages  
broadcast to all subscribers in a network area, for example  
local road reports or local taxi phone numbers. (Area  
Information services are not available from all operators).  
With the Flip closed, text and multimedia messages can be sent  
and received using the Jog Dial and the keypad. More advanced  
tasks are, however, best handled with the Flip open.  
BIO (Bearer Independent Object) messages. There are  
different types of messages:  
– Setup (e-mail, Internet, WAP accounts).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Messages  
87  
           
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To save an e-mail message to Outbox  
Before using Messages  
1. After composing your message, select Send.  
Before you can send and receive any messages (except for SMS)  
you need to set up the necessary accounts.  
2. Select Save to outbox.  
A simple way of setting up an Internet or e-mail account is to  
ask your service provider to send you a message that contains  
the required information to create an account automatically on  
your P908. Received auto-configuration messages are stored in  
the Auto setup inbox.  
Messages that you send from an e-mail synchronization account  
are always saved to Outbox and sent from your PC after your  
next synchronization.  
Draft  
See ‘Getting started with Internet and Messages’ on page 171.  
Draft contains messages that are not ready to be sent.  
To store a new message in Draft  
Create the message and exit without selecting Send  
.
Folders in Messages  
Messaging accounts can have the following folders: Inbox  
,
To move a message from Outbox to Draft  
Open the Outbox message list and select Message > Move to Draft  
Outbox Draft and Sent.  
,
.
Inbox  
Sent  
Inbox contains received messages. You can reply to, forward,  
and delete messages, but not edit them.  
Sent contains messages you have sent from your P908.  
Tip Regularly delete old messages from your Sent folder,  
especially those with attachments, to clear storage space.  
Outbox  
Outbox contains messages that are ready to be sent. If you are  
creating several e-mails, and not using GPRS, you can reduce  
connection time by saving them to Outbox and then connect and  
send them all at the same time.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
88  
Messages  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To write and send a text message  
The accounts in Messages  
1. In  
Messages select Create SMS. (You can also select SMS >  
When you open Messages, a list of your accounts appears.  
tap Message > New.)  
The top items in the list, Create SMS, and Create MMS, are  
shortcuts for directly creating new text messages (SMS or  
EMS).  
2. Enter the recipient’s number or select To and select recipient  
or recipients from your contact list and select Done.  
3. Write your message.  
An asterisk next to an account indicates that a message has  
arrived since you last opened the accounts inbox.  
4. Go to the address tab  
delivery report or not.  
and specify whether you want a  
5. Tap Send.  
Handling text messages  
To add an EMS item to your text message  
Use the icons at the bottom of the screen to select the type of  
item you wish to add.  
A text message is sent via SMS (Short Message Service). It can  
contain up to 160 characters (70 characters if you use non-Latin  
characters). If you create a longer message it will be sent as two  
(or more) separate messages (concatenated), but usually  
received as one message. If you add pictures, sounds and other  
items to your message it becomes an EMS message.  
Tap  
Tap  
to insert one of the smilies that appears.  
to insert a picture or an animation. The last used  
picture or animation appears.  
– Tap More to get more animations to use.  
– Tap New to draw a picture of your own.  
Text messages can be sent to one or more people (not more than  
thirty, we recommend), and you can request a delivery report  
when your text messages have been delivered to the recipients.  
The delivery report arrives on your P908 as a text message.  
Tap  
to insert a sound. The last used sounds appears.  
– Tap More to get more sounds to use.  
If you leave the message before sending it, it will automatically  
be stored in the Draft folder (unless you edit a message which  
was already located in Outbox).  
a
Tap  
Tap  
to write bold text.  
a
to change the size of the text you write.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Messages  
89  
           
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To format the text in the message using EMS features  
1. Highlight the text you want to format.  
2. Tap Edit > Format text.  
You can take a picture with the CommuniCorder and send it as a  
multimedia message using the Send as command from Pictures.  
Multimedia messages can be sent to a mobile phone or an e-mail  
account.  
3. Tap General tab to change the Alignment and Font  
.
How a recipient receives an MMS you send depends on your  
MMS service and how the receiving phone complies to MMS  
specifications:  
4. Tap Style tab to check the character style check boxes: bold,  
italic, underline, or strike through.  
5. Select Done  
.
Compliant and conformant phones can receive pictures of  
size 160x120 pixels.  
Note Text formatting only applies when latin (English) is  
selected as input language.  
Compliant and non-conformant phones can receive pictures  
of almost any size.  
a
You can also use the icons  
and  
described above.  
a
Partly compliant phones can read the message on the  
Internet, using WAP.  
To save a received EMS item  
1. Tap the item.  
Non-compliant phones will receive an SMS notification.  
2. Select Edit > Save object  
.
Incoming multimedia messages  
Handling multimedia messages  
To play a received multimedia message  
MMS (Multimedia Messaging Service) messages can include  
real pictures, animations and sound, organised like a slide  
presentation with time-based control of the playback.  
Composing a multimedia message is like building a small slide  
presentation. A typical page will consist of a picture, some text  
and sound. Refer to Technical data, section ‘MMS’ on page 196  
for supported file types that you can add.  
Open the MMS inbox and select the new message.  
The first time a multimedia message is opened it plays  
automatically. The next time you open the message you can  
play it by pressing the Play Button (Flip open) or by  
choosing Play from the menu (Flip closed).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
90  
Messages  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To forward an MMS  
2. From the Select template dialogue, tap the name of the  
template you want and tap Select. The Blank template will  
open a blank message.  
1. Open the message.  
2. From the Message menu, select Forward  
.
3. The first page of the new message is now displayed. Select  
3. On the  
mobile number or e-mail address.  
4. Select Send  
address tab, select To and enter the recipient’s  
an item from the menu that appears. Tap  
to open the  
menu if it does not open automatically If you select Add  
.
.
scribble the Image editor presents a white background onto  
which manual graphics can be added. This includes controls  
for pen, crop, colour, scale, rotate and pen width.  
To store a received MMS item, for example a picture  
1. Open the message.  
4. Tap  
again to add text,  
audio or voice to the page.  
Tap the page to return to  
it.  
2. Select the picture you want to save.  
M
e
s
sa  
g
e
E di  
t
D
raft  
3. Select Save picture or select Edit > Save picture  
.
2
1/1  
4. Select the storage location.  
5. Tap  
if you want to  
change the time this page  
should be shown. Default  
time is 5 seconds.  
5. Select Save  
.
C
A
A
A
A
A
A
o
mmuni  
dd id  
dd pi  
dd sc  
C
order  
You can store items both internally and externally. You can also  
copy them between the internal memory and the Memory Stick  
Duo. See ‘Folders’ on page 27.  
v
e
o
c
ture  
6. Select Edit > Background  
colour to give the message  
a background colour.  
ribble  
dd  
dd  
dd  
t
ex  
ound  
ec ding  
t
s
Creating and sending multimedia messages  
r
or  
7. Tap  
to add a new page  
To create a new multimedia message  
to the multimedia  
1. In  
Messages select Create MMS. (You can also select MMS >  
message in which you can  
insert items.  
S
end  
Message > New. or open an existing message and select  
Message > New ).  
8. Select Edit > Page order to  
change the page order in the message.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Messages  
91  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To enter the recipient’s phone number  
Editing multimedia messages  
1. Select the  
address tab.  
Here you can see the first  
page with an inserted  
picture.  
2. Select To and select the recipient from Contacts.  
or:  
M
e
s
sag  
e
Edit  
Draft  
5
1/1  
Select the line beside To and enter the recipient’s mobile  
number or e-mail address.  
To delete, replace or edit an  
inserted item  
Select the inserted item and  
choose an action.  
To insert an attachment  
1. While creating your multimedia message, select the  
attachment tab, select Add  
.
While editing an image you  
can add scribble, resize, crop  
or rotate your image. To undo  
your changes, select Edit >  
Undo all.  
Edit picture  
Edit time  
2. Select the type of attachment you want to add.  
3. Select the attachment.  
Delete  
Copy  
To send the multimedia message  
Tap Send  
.
Note If you have accepted  
changes by selecting Done,  
you will not be able to undo  
them.  
Send  
Preferences to a multimedia message  
Select Edit > Preferences to set the preferences to a multimedia  
message. The following settings are available:  
To edit item time  
For each item in a page, it is possible to set the time when the  
item appears and for how long it is displayed or played.  
Hide number – Prevent your phone number from being  
displayed in the recipient’s phone.  
Read report – Request a receipt when the recipient has open  
your message.  
1. Select the item so it is highlighted  
Delivery report – Request a receipt when the message has been  
2. Select Edit time  
delivered to the recipient’s phone.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
92  
Messages  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
3. Set the Start , which is the number of seconds before the item  
appears after the start of the page. The default is 0, meaning  
show or play immediately.  
On means that the multimedia message is downloaded and  
can be read like any other message. There is no  
intermediate step.  
4. The default Duration is for the item to continue for the  
remaining duration of the page. To change this, un-check  
Page time and change the duration to the required value in  
seconds. Start time + duration cannot exceed total page time.  
Handling e-mails  
Writing e-mails  
You can also tap  
, or select Edit > Page time to see the time  
settings for all items in a page. Tap the time bar to adjust the  
time settings for each item.  
To write a new e-mail  
Select an e-mail account and select Message > New  
.
To add or delete a template  
If you leave the message before sending it, it will automatically  
be stored in the Draft folder (unless you edit a message which  
was already located in Outbox).  
To make a template from a message, select Save as template,  
give the template a name, and tap Done  
.
To mark an e-mail as urgent  
To delete a template, tap the name of the template you want  
On the  
address tab, select High in the Priority list.  
in the Select template dialogue and tap Delete  
.
To enter addresses from Contacts when writing an e-mail  
To set the download method for receiving multimedia  
messages, manual or automatic  
1. Select To:  
2. In the Select contact dialogue select the check box for each  
In  
Control panel, select Connections > Messaging accounts >  
entry you want to send the e-mail to.  
MMS > Automatic.  
3. Select Done  
.
Off means that only headers will be downloaded and can  
be viewed.  
Tip To enter several addresses manually (without using  
Contacts) in a text message, multimedia message or in an e-  
mail: enter a comma between each address.  
Home only means the same as for On below, but only valid  
in your home country/region.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Messages  
93  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Sending e-mail  
‘Send as’ e-mail  
You can send the entry you are viewing as an attachment to a  
To send an e-mail message  
Select Send > Send immediately  
new e-mail from the following applications:  
Music player,  
.
Video,  
Viewer,  
Internet,  
Calendar,  
Contacts,  
Tasks,  
Jotter,  
Sound recorder, and  
Pictures.  
If your P908 is connected to the Internet when you send an e-  
mail, it will be sent immediately and your P908 will remain  
connected to the Internet. If not, your P908 will connect to the  
Internet and then send the e-mail.  
To attach a Calendar entry to an e-mail message  
1. Open the entry in Calendar and select Calendar > Send As.  
2. Select Email > Done.  
Tip If you are creating several e-mails, and not using GPRS,  
you can reduce connection time by saving them to Outbox and  
then connect and send them all at the same time.  
3. Complete the e-mail message and select Send  
.
To attach a Contact to an e-mail message  
To save an e-mail message and send it later  
1. Open the contact details for the contact you wish to send and  
Select Send > Save to Outbox  
.
select Contacts > Send as.  
2. Select Email > Done.  
To move an e-mail message from Outbox to Draft  
In your list of Outbox messages, tap to the left of the e-mail (a  
3. Complete the e-mail message and select Send  
.
tick appears), and select Message > Move to draft  
.
Receiving e-mail  
If you leave the message before sending it, it will automatically  
be stored in the Draft folder (unless it was created from Outbox).  
E-mails must be fetched from the e-mail server on the Internet  
or at your office. This can be done manually using the Get & send  
function or automatically by requesting the P908 to check for  
new e-mail at certain times.  
Adding attachments  
When you forward an e-mail, you can choose whether or not to  
forward the attachment. Large attachments increase the size of  
an e-mail and consequently the connection time needed to send  
it.  
To attach an entry to an e-mail message  
1. On the  
attachment tab, select Add.  
2. Select the type of attachment you want to add, and select the  
item.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
94  
Messages  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Receiving attachments  
Downloading  
Any attachments to an e-mail message are displayed on the  
tab. The icon next to an attachment in the list identifies the  
type of attachment.  
You can choose not to download large e-mails and receive just a  
header instead. A header contains the subject line, sender’s  
details, and date, but not the full message.  
To view an attachment you need a viewer for that type of  
file.Your P908 comes with pre-installed viewers for Microsoft  
Word, Excel, PowerPoint and Adobe Acrobat (PDF) files. More  
viewers are available from the Multimedia for P908 CD.  
To specify a size limit for e-mail, above which you only receive  
a header  
1. Select  
Control panel > Connections > Messaging accounts >  
Email (select the e-mail account) > Edit.  
To save an attachment, for example a picture  
2. Select Inbox.  
1. Open the e-mail message and select the  
tab.  
3. Select an option from the Download list.  
2. Tap the attachment, which opens the Pictures application.  
In your list of messages, headers are denoted by  
.
3. Select Pictures > Save  
.
To download the full message  
4. Select the location where you want to store the message.  
5. Select Save  
1. In your list of messages, select the header.  
2. The dialogue Download, Yes/No appears.  
.
You can store items both internally and externally. You can also  
copy them between the internal memory and the Memory Stick  
Duo. See ‘Folders’ on page 27.  
3. Select Yes  
.
To download a series of messages  
1. In your list of messages, select the check box to the left of  
each entry (a tick appears).  
Reply with history  
If messages is set up to reply with history, the original message  
is included when you reply to it, see ‘Messaging accounts’ on  
page 160.  
2. Select Get & Send  
.
Note If you delete a header, or a whole message, the message  
will no longer be visible in your message list.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Messages  
95  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Downloading e-mails automatically  
You can schedule your e-mail messages to be downloaded  
automatically at certain times.  
A scheduled download will fail if your P908 is engaged in a  
voice call. It may fail if it is connected to another ISP, that is,  
through a different Internet account than specified for the e-mail  
account.  
To download your e-mails automatically  
If e-mail messages are not downloaded because a scheduled  
download fails, they will be downloaded during the next  
successful connection.  
1. In Control Panel, select Connections > Messaging accounts >  
Email.  
2. Select the required e-mail account and select Edit.  
3. Select Inbox > Schedule.  
More about messaging  
4. Set time or interval for scheduled download and select Done  
.
Disconnecting and connecting  
Finding messages  
If your P908 is already connected to the Internet when you send  
an e-mail, it will remain connected after sending it. If your P908  
is not connected before sending an e-mail, it will connect and  
send the message.  
In both the list of accounts and list of messages, Find searches  
through the subject lines, senders’ details, the text of the  
message, and dates.  
In an open message, Find searches through the text of the  
message and highlights the text it finds.  
Note You can send text messages while connected to the  
Internet. If your connection is CSD or HSCSD it must be  
disconnected before you can make or receive a phone call.  
If your connection is GPRS, it may be suspended to enable a  
phone call to be made or received. You may need to repeat the  
data activity (Web page fetch, get e-mail) after the call has  
ended.  
You can only search through e-mail messages that have been  
fully downloaded.  
If your P908 cannot connect to the e-mail account, automatic  
download will fail, and  
account.  
will be displayed next to the e-mail  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
96  
Messages  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Note If you save an address from an e-mail synchronized from  
your company PC, the corporate version of the address, rather  
Get and send  
To get and send messages for one specific account  
1. Select  
than the full Internet e-mail address, will be saved to Contacts.  
If the corporate version of the address is not an Internet address  
(an X.400 address, or just the sender's name, for example), you  
can use it to send e-mails from your synchronized account, but  
you cannot use it in e-mails that you send directly from your  
P908.  
Messages  
.
2. Select the desired account (MMS or e-mail for example).  
3. Select Get&send.  
To get and send messages for all your accounts  
1. Select  
Messages.  
Connecting and disconnecting from the  
Internet  
2. Select Message > Get&send. Any unsent messages in your  
Outbox will now be sent and new messages not yet  
downloaded will be downloaded to your P908.  
To disconnect from the Internet  
1. Select the connection icon (HSCSD/CSD  
in the status bar.  
or GPRS  
)
Note If the e-mail account is set up to access the mail server  
through a Secure access connection (see ‘Secure tokens’ on  
page 167) you must have the Flip open when you use Get&send  
If the Flip is closed you will see an error message.  
.
2. Select Disconnect from the pop-up menu  
3. The dialogue Do you want to disconnect from Internet?, Yes/No  
appears.  
Saving contact details  
4. Select Yes  
.
When you receive a message, you can save the contact details of  
the person who sent you the message.  
If your service provider or network is  
unavailable  
To save the sender’s details  
On the message’s  
address tab, select From.  
Sometimes a message cannot be sent because your P908 cannot  
connect to a network. Please check that the Messaging Account  
and Internet Account information in the Control Panel is correct.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Messages  
97  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
If you have both GPRS and Dial-Up Internet accounts, try  
sending the e-mail message using an account of the other type.  
GPRS Internet accounts use the GPRS network and Dial-Up  
Internet accounts use the GSM network.  
the availability of area information services and area  
information channel numbering. See ‘‘Area tab’ on page 163 for  
more information.  
Synchronized e-mails  
When you set up a synchronization with your PC, an account for  
synchronized e-mail messages is automatically created on your  
P908 and indicated by  
. You can have more than one account  
for synchronized e-mails. If you send an e-mail as PC mail, the  
mail will be sent via the PC when you have synchronized your  
P908 with the PC.  
If you set up a POP or IMAP account which accesses the same  
mail server, the two accounts will contain the same messages.  
Note that there is no connection between the accounts; the  
copies in each account are separate.  
Area information  
Area information messages are text messages that are sent to all  
subscribers in a certain network area, for example, a local traffic  
report. When you receive an area information message, the  
message automatically appears on the screen. When you dismiss  
the information, it will be stored in the Area info Inbox until it is  
replaced by a new message received on the same channel.  
Please consult your service provider for more information about  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
98  
Messages  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Contacts  
Contacts is like an address book, in which you can store names,  
phone numbers, e-mail addresses and other useful information,  
including photographs.  
Menus  
In both list view and detail view, you can use  
some of the P908’s contact functions. The options will vary  
depending on the situation.  
to access  
The information stored in the SIM is also accessible. SIM  
entries can be copied to Contacts and Contacts entries can be  
copied to the SIM. Some SIM cards have Information numbers  
and Service numbers stored on the SIM card by the operator.  
These numbers are useful for service and information, and are  
accessible from the SIM within Contacts.  
Menu options in list view  
SIM – Display the contacts of the SIM card.  
Send owner card – Send your owner card (See ‘Making an  
owner card’ on page 105) via infrared or Bluetooth wireless  
technology.  
You can synchronize the contents in Contacts with one of the  
PIM applications in your PC supported by the P908. See  
‘Synchronization and backup’ on page 140.  
Find – Search for a specific contact.  
Undo delete – Restore the last deleted contact. Will appear  
only if there is something to undo.  
Using Contacts with the Flip  
closed  
# Applications – Access the application list view.  
Menu options in detail view  
Menu options in detail view: (availability depends on the type of  
contact detail, for example mobile number, that is highlighted.)  
With the Flip closed, you can make calls and send text or  
multimedia messages.  
Contacts has two views when the Flip is closed:  
Send MMS – Send a multimedia message to the active contact  
Send SMS – Send a text message to the active contact.  
Call – Call the active contact.  
An alphabetical list of contacts. The list view is the  
starting point for finding a contact.  
List view  
The details for a contact.  
Detail view  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contacts  
99  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Send as – Send the active contact using infrared or Bluetooth  
wireless technology.  
3. Select a contact and press the Jog Dial or press  
the detail view for a contact.  
to open  
Delete contact – Delete the active contact.  
To return to the list view, press  
.
# Applications – Will access the application list view.  
Note To make a call to a contact in the SIM, select SIM from the  
options menu. If there are service numbers or information  
numbers stored on the SIM card, you can also access them.  
Menu options in SIM  
View all – Switch to Contacts list.  
To make a call  
Service numbers – Display the service numbers on the SIM  
card. This option is only displayed if there are service  
numbers stored on the SIM card.  
1. Select a phone number.  
2. Press the Jog Dial or press  
.
Information numbers – As for service numbers above.  
Find – Search for a specific contact.  
or  
1. Select a phone number.  
# Applications – Will access the application list view.  
2. Select Call from the options menu.  
To send a text message  
Selecting a contact with the Flip closed  
1. Select a phone number.  
To select a contact  
2. Select Send SMS from the options menu.  
1. Select  
.
To send a multimedia message  
1. Select a phone number.  
2. Then either:  
– Scroll down to the desired contact.  
2. Select Send MMS from the options menu.  
– Press a number key. The first contact corresponding to the  
first letter of the key appears. To search further, continue  
to enter the letters with the keys.  
– Select Find from the menu and search for the contact.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
100  
Contacts  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To add a contact  
The details for a contact.  
Detail view  
Edit view  
Contact details, displayed in a way that allows you  
to add and change the information.  
You can create a new contact using information from a recently  
received voice call or message. See also ‘Add to contacts’ on  
page 56.  
Tabs at the bottom of the list help you to find a contact fast. To  
highlight the first entry that begins with the first character on a  
tab, select the tab once. To highlight the first entry that begins  
with the next character on the tab, select the tab again.  
1. Select Yes when asked to add to contacts.  
2. Enter contact name and edit the number, if required.  
The entries are arranged in Pinyin order. If you have selected  
English as language (see ‘Language selection’ on page 167),  
the entries are arranged in Latin alphabetic order.  
To delete a contact  
1. Select the contact.  
2. Select Delete contact from the options menu.  
Pinyin order  
To restore a deleted contact, select Undo delete from the  
options menu.  
All entries containing Latin letters are sorted under the first tab.  
Latin order  
Using Contacts with the Flip  
open  
abc def ghi jkl mno pqr stu v-z  
Latin entries are arranged in alphabetic order.  
Open the Flip and tap  
launcher  
or select Contacts in the Application  
to open Contacts.  
Making a call with the Flip open  
Contacts has three views when the Flip is open:  
To open Contacts  
An alphabetical list of contacts. The list view is the  
starting point for finding a contact.  
List view  
Tap  
or select Contacts in the Application launcher  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contacts  
101  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To make a call  
Creating and editing contacts  
1. If required, change folder from the Folders menu.  
You can sort the contacts according to first name, last name or  
2. Scroll down to the desired contact.  
company. The contact entries can also be filtered by folder, such  
If the contact list is long, first select a tab at the bottom of the  
view.  
as Business or Personal  
.
To create a new contact  
3. Select the contact to display the contact details.  
1. Select Contacts > New  
.
4. Depending on what you want to do, select according to the  
following:  
2. Enter the desired information. When applicable, select from  
the drop-down menus.  
– Select  
– Select  
– Select  
– Select  
– Select  
or  
or the phone number to make a call.  
or the e-mail address to send an e-mail.  
or the URL to open a Web page.  
to send a multimedia message.  
to send a text message.  
To add a field to a contact  
1. Select the contact.  
2. Select Edit > Edit contact.  
3. Select Edit > Add field.  
4. Select the field to be added from the drop-down list.  
5. Select Add.  
Using service and information numbers  
To call an Information number or Service number on the SIM  
card  
To add a DTMF tone sequence  
1. Select a field and set it to Phone (h)  
.
1. Select SIM in the folders menu.  
Add a new field if necessary.  
2. Select Contacts > Information numbers / Service numbers and  
select a phone number or select a sub-category and then a  
phone number.  
2. Enter a  
p
and then the tone digits. Enter a to insert a pause.  
p
It is necessary to start the tone sequence with a p so the  
phone recognises it as a tone sequence.  
3. Select Call  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
102  
Contacts  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To send a DTMF tone sequence during a call  
To add a photo or other picture to a contact  
1. During a call, open the contact’s detail view.  
1. Select the photo view tab  
2. Tap the picture space.  
3. If required, change folder.  
4. Select the picture to use.  
5. Tap the Select button.  
.
2. Tap  
at the tone sequence.  
Read more about DTMF tones in ‘Controlling tone-based  
services’ on page 52.  
To add a voice dialling command  
Contacts with a voice dialling command are shown in Voice  
commands in the folders menu.  
To change a picture, select the picture and select Replace  
image.  
To remove a picture, select the picture and select Delete image.  
1. Select  
at the bottom of the screen.  
2. Select a number.  
To personalize the ring melody for a contact  
Contacts with a personalized ring melody are shown in Personal  
ring type in the folders menu.  
3. Tap the Record button and record a voice command after the  
tone.  
4. Tap Play to check the quality of the recording.  
1. Against Ring Tone, select Find sound from the drop-down  
menu.  
To remove a voice command, select the Del button.  
2. If required, change folder.  
3. Select the required sound.  
To add a note to a contact  
1. Select  
.
4. Tap  
and  
to preview the sound.  
2. Enter the text.  
5. Tap Select to set this sound for the contact.  
3. If you do not want the note to be included when you send,  
beam, or synchronize the contact, select the Private check  
box.  
Note The selected ring melody will only be played if the  
network provides a CLI (Calling Line Identity) to enable the  
contact to be identified, otherwise the Default Melody will be  
played.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contacts  
103  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Note If the ring melody selected for this contact is later deleted  
See ‘Sending and receiving items’ on page 29 for information  
or moved, the Default Melody will be played.  
about how to receive contacts from another device.  
To change the details of a contact  
1. Select a contact.  
To move, send or delete a contact  
1. Select Contacts > Contacts manager  
.
2. Select Edit > Edit contact, or tap the tab.  
2. Select the contacts you want to manage.  
(If required, change folder from the Folders menu. Selecting  
All will show all the contacts from all the folders except the  
SIM. Clicking the Select all check box will select all the  
contacts in the current folder.)  
3. Change the desired information. When applicable, select  
from the drop-down menus.  
To delete a contact  
3. Select Send / Move / Delete  
.
1. Select the contact.  
4. Follow the instructions, for example, select a folder or a  
sending method.  
2. Select Contacts > Delete contact.  
To create or edit a contact on the SIM card  
5. Tap Done or Yes to confirm the action.  
1. Select SIM from the Folders menu.  
To search for an entry containing specific text  
1. Select Contacts > Find.  
2. Create or edit the contact as described above.  
All options are, however, not available for the SIM card  
contacts.  
2. Enter the text string you wish to search for.  
3. Select either In all fields or In Names & Company and tap Find.  
4. When the search is complete, all results will be displayed.  
Managing contacts  
Note Searching is not case sensitive and you do not have to  
enter an entire word to locate a matching entry.  
You can use Contacts manager to move contacts between the  
folders, send contacts as a Vcard to another device, or to delete  
them. You can also send or delete contacts on the SIM card with  
the Contacts manager  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
104  
Contacts  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
2. Select Contacts > Set as owner card  
.
Copying contacts to and from the SIM card  
You can also copy information between the contacts list and the  
SIM card.  
Tip You can also create an owner card by viewing the detail  
view of a contact and selecting the menu option Set as owner card  
.
To copy contacts from the SIM card  
To send your owner card  
1. Select SIM in the folders menu to the right in the menu bar.  
1. Open the list view, and then select Contacts > Send owner card  
.
2. Select Edit > Copy all to Contacts for copying all SIM entries  
or  
2. Send the card using Send as  
.
Read more about sending items in ‘Sending and receiving items’  
on page 29.  
Tap a SIM entry to open it and select Edit > Copy to Contacts to  
copy the selected SIM entry.  
To view or edit your owner card  
To copy contacts to the SIM card  
Select Contacts > View owner card.  
1. Select a contact.  
2. Select Edit > Copy to SIM card  
.
3. If the contact has multiple phone numbers, select the number  
to copy.  
Preferences  
4. Select Done  
.
Contacts tab  
To sort the contact list and show the preferred phone number  
Making an owner card  
1. Select Edit > Preferences  
.
You can create an electronic business card, containing your  
contact details, including notes and a photo. You can then send  
this card to another device.  
2. Select the desired sorting option (first name, last name or  
company) and tap Done.  
3. If you want a phone number to be shown next to the name in  
To create your owner card  
list view, select Show preferred phone number.  
1. Select Contacts > New and enter your details.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contacts  
105  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
If no preferred number has been set up for the contact, the  
first phone number will be used.  
4. Select Done.  
To change the preferred phone number  
1. Select a contact.  
2. Select Edit > Edit contact  
.
3. Select Edit > Show in list.  
4. Select the number to be shown from the list.  
5. Tap Done.  
Note If no number appears, ensure that Show preferred phone  
number is checked in preferences.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
106  
Contacts  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Calendar  
The Calendar function helps you to keep track of appointments  
and events, and you can also set reminder alarms for the entries.  
Creating calendar entries  
A reminder is denoted by a  
.
To create a new calendar entry  
1. Select Calendar > New and enter a short description of the  
Different views  
entry. This is the description you see in the calendar.  
You can see your Calendar entries in three views with the Flip  
open: Day, Week and Month. With the Flip closed you will see  
the Day view.  
2. Tap Unfiled (the folder menu) in the menu bar and select a  
folder to store the entry in.  
3. Continue to enter information for the items on the detail  
page.  
To change view in Flip open  
Type - Specify if the entry is an appointment, reminder or  
all day event.  
Tap  
Tap  
Tap  
Tap  
to display the Day view.  
to display the Week view.  
Date - Select the date to get a calendar where you can set a  
date for the entry.  
to display the Month view.  
to navigate to the present day in the displayed view.  
Time - Set start and end time for the entry.  
If you tap an entry in week view, the subject and time for that  
entry are shown.  
Location - Specify a location or select a location you have  
used before.  
Alarm - Select the check box if you want your P908 to alert  
you about the entry with a sound. Select the time and date  
that appears for your settings.  
To navigate backwards or forwards in the current view  
Tap the left and right arrows in the button bar at the bottom of  
the screen. You can also rotate the Jog Dial.  
Repeat - Specify if you want to repeat the entry or not.  
Read more about this below.  
To navigate to a specific date in the current view  
Tap the day, week or month heading at the top of the display to  
show a calendar pop-up in which you can select a specific date.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Calendar  
107  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Private - Select the check box to prevent the item from  
being viewed by others than yourself if you synchronize  
your calendar with, for example, your PC.  
Managing calendar entries  
To find a certain entry  
4. Select the note page tab to write a note for this entry.  
5. Select to save and close the entry.  
1. Select Calendar > Find  
.
2. Enter a search word in the menu that appears.  
3. Select where to search (Everywhere, Future, Past).  
4. Select Find. A result list is then displayed.  
5. Select an entry on the result list to open it.  
You should delete old entries regularly to release memory.  
To create re-occurring entries  
1. When the entry is open, select Repeat  
.
– Set repeating to Daily Monthly by date, Monthly by  
,
Weekly  
,
To delete an entry  
day  
,
Yearly by date or Yearly by day.  
Open the entry and select Calendar > Delete entry  
.
Interval - Specify how often the event will happen, for  
example, by selecting Weekly and Interval 2 means that the  
event will go off every two weeks on the specified day.  
A deleted entry may be restored with Edit > Undo delete  
.
To delete all entries in a period of time  
Forever/Until - Set the time limit for the alarm or select  
forever.  
1. Select Calendar > Remove entries  
.
2. Select the time period and select Done. All entries from that  
2. Select days - Weekly repeated events can be set to occur twice  
or more in a week. For example, eating lunch with a friend  
Tuesday and Friday every week.  
time period are deleted from the Calendar.  
Note Repeated entries will not be deleted.  
Note You cannot repeat All Day Events  
To copy, cut or paste an entry  
1. Open the entry.  
To edit an entry  
2. Select Edit > Copy entry/ Cut entry.  
3. Go to the day where you want to place the entry.  
4. Select Paste entry.  
1. Open the entry by tapping it in the calendar.  
2. Make the changes in accordance with the instructions above.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
108  
Calendar  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To move a Calendar item to Tasks  
2. Select the General tab, and fill in the required details.  
1. Open the entry and select Calendar > Move to Tasks  
.
To customise the alarm settings  
1. Select Edit > Preferences.  
2. Select the Alarm tab.  
2. The entry is moved, not copied.  
If you move an entry with an alarm, the alarm will also sound in  
Tasks.  
Now, you can change the Alarm precedes event by setting - the  
To cut or copy Calendar entries to the Tasks application  
1. Open the entry and select Edit > Cut entry or Copy entry.  
2. Open Tasks.  
length of time before an entry that the alarm goes off.  
To assign colours to your entries using the folders  
1. In Calendar, select the folders menu to the right in the menu  
3. Select Edit > Paste entry.  
bar and select Edit folders.  
2. Select a folder and select Edit or create a new folder by  
selecting Add  
3. Select the colour box and select colour for that folder and  
select Done  
.
Sending and receiving calendar  
entries  
.
You can send and receive calendar entries using Send as. See  
Entries in a folder with a specific colour appear in that colour in  
Day and Week views (but not in Month view) so that you can  
see the pattern of events in your diary. Reminders appear as  
whatever the folder colour.  
‘Sending and receiving items’ on page 29.  
Preferences  
You can customise the calendar views and alarm settings to suit  
your own needs.  
Saving changes  
If you leave Calendar while editing an entry, your changes will  
be saved automatically.  
To customise the calendar view, General tab  
1. Select Edit > Preferences.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Calendar  
109  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Tasks  
With the Tasks function you can make a list of things you need  
to do. The folders help you to separate different types of  
activities.  
Completed – Select the check box when the task is  
done.This can also be done directly in the Tasks list.  
Priority – Set a priority for the task. You can sort the tasks  
by priority.  
You can move entries between Tasks and the Calendar, which is  
useful when you come to schedule a Tasks entry. You can also  
send an entry via text message, infrared, Bluetooth wireless  
technology, multimedia message or e-mail.  
Due date – Select the check box to set a deadline for the  
task. Select the date that appears to get a calendar where  
you can set a due date.  
Alarm – Select the check box if you want your P908 to  
alert you about the task. Select the time and date that  
appears for your settings.  
Creating task entries  
Private – Select the check box to prevent the task from  
being visible by others, when synchronized with shared  
calendars or tasks in other devices, for example your PC.  
The Tasks list shows a short description of the task. Select a task  
to see its full information.  
A task entry consists of two pages. One detail page where you  
set the properties for the task, and one page where you can add  
notes.  
4. Select the note page tab to write a note for this entry.  
5. Select to save and close the task.  
Note Delete task will delete the whole task entry.  
To create a new task entry  
1. Select Tasks > New and enter a short description of the task.  
To edit an entry  
This is the description you see in the task list.  
1. Open the entry by tapping it in the Tasks list.  
2. Make the changes according to the instructions above.  
2. Select Unfiled (the folder menu) in the menu bar and select a  
folder to store the task in.  
3. Continue to enter information for the items on the detail  
page.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
110  
Tasks  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To restore a deleted entry  
Managing task entries  
Select Edit > Undo delete.  
To open an existing entry  
Select the entry in the Tasks list.  
To delete all completed entries  
In your Tasks list, select Tasks > Delete completed  
.
To mark an entry as completed  
Note When you delete All Completed Entries, they are deleted  
Select the check box to the left of the entry in the Tasks list.  
permanently and cannot be restored.  
To sort the entries  
Select Edit > Sort on priority or Sort on date  
.
Moving task entries  
To find a certain entry  
To move an entry to the Calendar  
1. Select Tasks > Find  
.
Open the entry and select Tasks > Move to Calendar. The entry  
2. Enter a search word.  
3. Select in which folder to search or use the default value  
is moved, not copied.  
To copy a task entry to Calendar  
All folders  
.
1. Open the entry and select Edit > Copy entry  
.
4. Select Find. A result list is then displayed.  
2. Open Calendar.  
5. Select an entry on the result list to open it.  
3. Enter the day you wish the task to appear.  
4. Select Edit > Paste entry in Calendar.  
To make a copy of an entry or paste an entry  
1. Open a task and select Edit > Copy entry.  
2. In list view, select Edit > Paste entry.  
Note If you move or copy an entry to the Calendar, it will lose  
the priority it was assigned in Tasks.  
To delete an entry  
Open the entry in the task list and then select Delete  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tasks  
111  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
If you do not set a due date for the tasks entry, the current date  
will be used for the new Calendar entry. If you move or copy an  
entry with an alarm, the alarm will also be moved to the  
Calendar.  
Sending and receiving task  
entries  
You can send and receive task entries using Send as. See  
‘Sending and receiving items’ on page 29.  
Preferences  
Select Edit > Preferences to alter the settings. The following  
settings are available.  
Display due dates – Select whether or not to display them in  
the Tasks list.  
Display completed – Select whether or not to display them  
in the Tasks list. This will not delete the completed tasks.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
112  
Tasks  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Jotter  
The Jotter works as a notebook where you can write notes and  
draw pictures. The folders help you to separate different types of  
notes.  
To edit a note while working with it  
For text, select Edit > Revert.  
The text returns to its original state. All changes are lost.  
A Jotter entry consists of two pages. One text page and one  
drawing page. With the Flip closed, you can read and edit your  
notes, but you cannot view or edit pictures.  
For sketches, select Edit > Undo.  
This choice removes your last pen stroke. If you change your  
mind, select Edit > Redo  
.
When opening Jotter you will see a list of entered notes, with the  
first words of each text note. Select a note to see its full  
information or edit it.  
To create a new note from text or sketches copied from another  
application  
Open the list of notes and select Edit > Paste  
.
Note If you paste a sketch over an existing sketch, the existing  
sketch will be deleted.  
Creating and editing notes  
Create a note with the Flip closed (text only)  
To create a new note  
1. Select Applications >Jotter with the Flip closed.  
1. Open Jotter and select Jotter >New.  
2. If you have previous notes stored, these will now be listed.  
Use the Jog Dial to select a previous note in order to open it.  
The new note will automatically start as a text note. Select  
a
to get bold text and  
to create a bullet list.  
a
3. Press  
if you want to create a new note. Select New.  
2. Select Unfiled (the folder menu) in the menu bar and select a  
Insert your text by using the keypad.  
folder to store the jotter in.  
Edit a note with the Flip closed  
3. Select the drawing page tab to draw a sketch for this note.  
1. Select Applications >Jotter with the Flip closed.  
4. Select  
to save and close the note.  
2. Use the Jog Dial to select a previous note in order to open it.  
3. Press . Select Edit. Insert your text using the keypad.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Jotter  
113  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Drawing pictures  
Managing notes  
You can draw with different  
nib widths and colours. The  
main window is the ‘paper’  
To delete a note  
1. Select the note in the notes list.  
The note opens.  
Jotter Edit  
Unfiled  
where you may draw with  
your stylus in the same way  
as you draw with an ordinary  
pen.  
2. Select Jotter > Delete note  
.
Select  
to change colour.  
to change the  
Sending and receiving notes  
Select  
You can send and receive notes using Send as. See ‘Sending and  
virtual nib.  
receiving items’ on page 29.  
Select  
to activate the  
Note Selecting Send as SMS will send the text only.  
eraser. Tap the eraser again to  
re-activate the pen.  
All jotter files (both text and  
drawings) are automatically  
stored in the P908. The list  
view will be presented to you as soon as you start the Jotter  
application.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
114  
Jotter  
           
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
TOOLS  
Sound recorder  
In Sound recorder you can record and listen to your own sound  
recordings. You can also send your recordings to other devices  
via Bluetooth wireless technology, infrared communication, e-  
mail or multimedia message, and use a sound recording as a ring  
signal.  
2. Select  
3. Select  
and start recording after the beep.  
to finish the recording.  
Key functions  
Select... To...  
Each memo is identified by the date and time it was recorded  
and by its position in the list of sound recordings.  
start recording a sound.  
listen to the current sound recording.  
stop the current sound recording.  
Making sound recordings  
go to the previous sound recording in the list.  
go to the next sound recording in the list.  
To record and save a sound recording  
1. Select  
>
> New.  
A new sound recording is created.  
To delete a sound recording  
1. Select a sound recording you want to delete.  
2. Select and start recording after the beep.  
3. Select to finish the recording.  
2. Select Delete > Yes  
.
The new sound recording is automatically saved in the list of  
sound recordings with the current date and time.  
To append to the end of a previous sound recording  
1. Select the required recording.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sound recorder  
115  
         
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Using sound recordings as ring  
signals  
You can set a sound recording as a ring signal.Your sound  
recordings will appear in the list of sounds that can be selected  
as ring signals. They will take the form voicenote and a number,  
for example voicenote1470  
.
To set a sound recording as ring signal see ‘Sounds and alerts’  
on page 149.  
Sending sound recordings  
You can send Sound recorder recordings via Bluetooth wireless  
technology, infrared communication, e-mail or multimedia  
message.  
To send a sound recording  
1. Select Sound recorder > Send as  
.
2. Select how you want to send the sound recording. See To  
send an item using Send as’ on page 29 for more  
information.  
Note All other sound media on your P908 is handled via the  
Music player application. You can send sound items from  
Music player and all received sound items are played using Music  
player  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
116  
Sound recorder  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Calculator  
Note The accuracy of the calculator function is limited.  
Key functions  
The Calculator is a standard 12-digit calculator. You can add,  
subtract, multiply, divide, calculate square roots and  
percentages. It also has a memory function.  
mr  
m+  
m-  
Tap once to retrieve a value from the memory and enter it  
into the screen.  
Tap twice to clear the memory.  
Tap once to store an entered value in the memory.  
If you already have entered a value in the memory, tap once  
to add the value on the screen to the value in the memory.  
To use the calculator  
1. Select  
>
.
Tap once to subtract the entered value from the value in the  
memory. The memory is adjusted but not displayed.  
2. Enter the calculations by tapping the digits.  
All calculations, except percentage calculations, are performed  
as they are entered, for example: 5+5x5=50, not 30.  
Tap once to delete the last digit you entered.  
Tap once to reset the screen to 0.  
C
Percentage calculations are performed backwards. To calculate,  
for example, 10% of 50, enter 50x10%. The result is displayed  
when you tap the %-key.  
You can copy and paste values to and from other applications by  
selecting Calculator > Copy or Paste  
.
Values stored in the memory are retained while using other  
applications.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Calculator  
117  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Time  
The time and date are always displayed on the Flip closed  
standby screen. You can customise the display of times and  
dates throughout your P908. You can set your current location  
and another location of your choice. It is also possible to set  
three different alarms.  
Confirm by tapping outside the time picker.  
6. Select Done  
.
Format  
You can specify how you want the time and date to be displayed  
on the screen, and if you want to use the 12- or 24-hour time  
format.  
Setting time and date  
To set the time and date display format  
To set the current time and date  
1. Select  
>
.
1. Select  
>
.
2. Tap the clock, or select Time > Set time & date, to view the  
2. Tap the clock, or select Time > Set time & date, to view the  
current time and date settings.  
current time and date settings.  
3. Select Format  
.
3. Tap the Date box, then use the arrows to set the current year  
and month. Then select the current day.  
4. Tap the Date Format box and choose a format.  
5. Tap the Date Separator box and choose a separator.  
4. Tap Summertime, then select the check box next to the zone  
that currently has summer time and tap Done. This is only  
required if you are currently in a country/region with summer  
time.  
6. Select a Time format  
.
7. Tap the Time separator box and choose a separator.  
8. Select Done  
.
5. Tap the time box, then tap the upper half of the hour or  
minute box to increase the number displayed, or the lower  
half to decrease the number.  
Use the am  
/pm box to switch between am and pm. (This is  
only possible if you use the 12-hour time format.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
118  
Time  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To set the locations  
Specifying workdays  
1. Select  
>
.
You can specify what days you work, if, for example, you want  
to set an alarm that sounds only on workdays. You can also  
specify the first day of your week to customise the display of  
both Week and Month views in Calendar.  
2. Tap Time > Set location  
.
3. Tap the Current Country/Region box and select the country/  
region you are in at that moment.  
4. Tap the Current City box and select the city you are in at that  
moment. If the city you are in is not listed, select the city  
closest to you.  
To specify your workdays  
1. Select  
>
.
2. Tap the clock, or select Time > Set time & date, to view the  
5. Tap the Other Country/Region box and choose a country/  
region.  
current time and date settings.  
3. Select Workdays  
.
6. Tap the Other City box and choose a city.  
4. Select the check boxes next to the days you normally work.  
7. Tap Done  
.
5. Select First day of week and choose a day.  
6. Tap Done  
.
Setting number formats  
You can choose how you want the measurements and numbers  
in your P908 to be displayed in all your applications. Distances  
can be displayed using the imperial or the metric system and  
different punctuation marks can be used as separators.  
Setting locations  
Specify the country/region and city you are currently in. The  
city you select will be displayed next to the clock in Time.  
If you are away from home, for example travelling in another  
country/region, it can be useful to know what the time is in your  
home country/region as well as the country/region you are in.  
The city you select as Other City will be displayed below the  
clock in Time.  
To set the number details  
1. Select  
>
.
2. Select Time > Set location  
.
3. Select Numbers  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Time  
119  
           
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
4. Choose separators and symbol positions from the drop-down  
lists. You can tap the keyboard icon to find currency  
symbols.  
2. Select one of the alarm slots.  
3. Select Time and choose at what time you want the alarm to go  
off. Confirm by tapping outside the time picker.  
5. Tap Done  
.
4. Select When and choose how often you want the alarm to go  
off:  
Once The alarm will go off once only, at a time more than  
24 hours from now but within the next eight days.  
Setting alarms  
You can set up to three different alarms in your P908. You can  
choose to activate one of the preset alarms, or set a new alarm  
with your own definitions.  
Next 24 hours Within the next 24 hours.  
Daily Every day at the specified time.  
Workdays Every workday at the specified time.  
Weekly Every week at the specified time.  
You can choose to set a silent alarm, where only a message is  
displayed when it goes off, or you can set a sound alert.  
5. Select Alarm sound and choose a sound.  
Alarms requires that the P908 is turned on. If you want to get  
alarms in an environment where radio transmitters are not  
allowed, you can set the P908 to flight mode, see ‘Flight mode’  
on page 52.  
6. Select Message and choose a preset message or write a new  
one.  
7. Tap Done  
.
8. Make sure the check box next to the alarm is selected.  
Note If you have connected a stereo headset to the P908, the  
alarm will only be heard in the headset.  
When the alarm goes off, select Snooze to postpone the alarm for  
five minutes or Silence to turn off the alarm sound. To turn off  
the alarm completely, tap Done  
.
To activate an existing alarm  
Select the check box in the alarm slot.  
status bar on the screen.  
is displayed on the  
To set a new alarm  
1. Select  
>
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
120  
Time  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Viewer  
With Viewer you can view Microsoft Word, Excel, and  
Common viewer functions  
PowerPoint documents as well as Adobe Acrobat (PDF)  
documents.  
To open a document from an e-mail or Internet page  
Support for additional file types can be installed from the  
Select the document link.  
Multimedia for P908 CD.  
The document viewer is started, showing the detail view of the  
document.  
When the Flip is open Viewer has two views:  
An alphabetical list of files, for selecting a file to  
view.  
List view  
To save the document in the P908  
1. Select Document > Save from the menu.  
The contents of a file, for viewing and manipulating  
the file.  
Detail view  
2. Select where to save the document and select Save  
.
Viewer is also started automatically when selecting and opening  
attachments to messages. The required view is selected based on  
the type of attachment.  
To open a document from the list view  
1. Select the Application launcher icon  
2. Select the Document viewer icon  
3. If required, change folder.  
.
.
To save documents to another location (internal or on the  
Memory Stick Duo) you use folders, see ‘Folders’ on page 27.  
4. Scroll to the desired file and select the file name.  
The document is shown in the Detail view.  
The functions available differ depending on the document type.  
General functions are similar between the document types and  
are therefore described first.  
To save the document to a different location  
1. Select Edit > Copy to from the menu.  
2. Select where to save the document and select Save  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Viewer  
121  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Viewing Word documents  
Viewing Excel spreadsheets  
To copy text from the document  
To copy text from the document  
1. Select the text to be copied. To select all text in the  
1. Select the text to be copied. To select all text in the  
document, select Edit > Select all.  
document, select Edit > Select all.  
2. Select Edit > Copy  
.
2. Select Edit > Copy.  
The text is put into the clipboard.  
The text is put into the clipboard and a message is displayed.  
Note Data copied from a spreadsheet cannot be pasted into the  
Calculator application if they include non-numerical values  
(such as currency symbols or formatting characters).  
To search for a text in the document  
1. Select Document > Find from the menu.  
2. Enter the text to search for.  
3. Select find.  
To search for a text in the document  
1. Select Spreadsheet > Find from the menu.  
2. Enter the text to search for.  
4. If required, select Document > Find next.  
5. To clear the highlighted search hits, select Document > Clear  
search hits.  
3. Select find.  
4. If required, select Spreadsheet > Find next.  
To change the document view  
5. To clear the highlighted search hits, select Spreadsheet > Clear  
1. To display the document as formatted text without pictures,  
search hits.  
wrapped to the screen size, select Edit > Draft view  
.
2. To display the document as formatted text including pictures,  
To switch between draft view and complete layout  
wrapped to the screen size, select Edit > Normal view.  
Select Edit > Draft view.  
3. To display the complete layout of the document, select Edit >  
To show/hide the spreadsheet grid lines  
Select Edit > Show gridlines.  
Page view.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
122  
Viewer  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To show/hide the spreadsheet headings  
2. To go to the previous slide in the presentation or page in the  
Select Edit > Show headings.  
PDF, select Edit > Previous slide.  
To navigate in the workbook  
1. To go to the next sheet in the workbook, select Edit > Next  
sheet  
.
2. To go to the previous sheet in the workbook, select Edit >  
Previous sheet.  
Viewing PowerPoint  
presentations and PDFs  
To search for a text in the document  
1. Select Drawing > Find from the menu.  
2. Enter the text to search for.  
3. Select find.  
4. If required, select Drawing > Find next.  
5. To clear the highlighted search hits, select Drawing > Clear  
search hits.  
To navigate in a multi-page presentation/PDF  
1. To go to the next slide in the presentation, select Edit > Next  
slide  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Viewer  
123  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
File manager  
With the File manager you can view, rename, copy, move, and  
delete files and folders on the P908. You can also add folders,  
send files and rename and format the Memory Stick Duo.  
From the file manager it is possible to reach the Control Panel  
Storage Manager, see ‘Storage manager’ on page 168. You can  
also format the Memory Stick Duo, see ‘Formatting a Memory  
Stick Duo’ on page 22.  
Initially, the root view is shown, with the sub folders:  
To move within the folder structure  
Audio, where all audio files are stored.  
Document, where different document files are stored.  
To move up in the hierarchy - tap the top folder.  
Image, where all images, pictures as well as drawings, are  
stored.  
To view the contents of a folder or a file - tap the top folder.  
Folders are opened in the file manager while other files are  
opened in the applicable application.  
Other, where all files not applicable for the other folders are  
stored.  
To add a folder  
Video, where all video clips are stored.  
1. Select File > New folder  
.
Using the folder menu, you can select between the internal  
storage and the external storage, that is, the Memory Stick Duo.  
The file path area at the top of the window shows the path to the  
shown folder.  
2. Type a folder name and tap Done  
.
To copy or move one or more folders or files  
1. Select the folders or files to handle.  
Note There is an important distinction between External media  
2. Select the required activity from the File menu.  
and External other External other lets you view folders that have  
.
3. Select the destination and tap Done  
.
been placed on the memory card by other equipment, such as  
digital cameras. This is the only place where these folders can  
be viewed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
124  
File manager  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To delete one or more folders or files  
Note Only empty folders can be deleted.  
1. Select the folders or files to delete.  
2. Select File > Delete  
.
3. Tap Delete  
.
To change properties for one or more folders or files  
1. Select the folders or files to change.  
2. Select File > Properties  
.
3. Change the properties, as required.  
4. Tap Done  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File manager  
125  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Online services  
Online services is a customised service offered by a network  
i
operator. This function is network- or subscription-dependent.  
Online services provides a mechanism that allows applications  
that exist on the SIM to interact and operate with the P908. It  
may provide services ranging from weather forecasts to the  
latest information from the stock market.  
Online service are placed on your SIM card by your operator.  
Note Contact your operator to find out which services are  
available for your account.  
Note If this service is available on your SIM, the Online  
services application will appear in the application list under a  
name defined by the SIM provider. However, the icon used to  
represent the Online services application  
will not change.  
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
126  
Online services  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Dictionary  
The dictionary application contains both English - Chinese and  
Chinese - English dictionaries.  
Chinese meaning (English - Chinese dictionary only).  
Synonym (optional, English - Chinese dictionary only).  
Antonym (optional, English - Chinese dictionary only).  
The dictionary operates in flip open mode only. Closing the flip  
will shut the dictionary down.  
English usage examples and its Chinese meaning (optional,  
English - Chinese dictionary only).  
Views  
There are three views in Dictionary:  
General View – where the user inputs a word and is given a  
brief explanation. Depending on the settings, the information  
is displayed horizontally or vertically.  
Searching for a word  
To look up a word in the dictionary  
Detail View – where the detailed explanation of a selected  
entry is displayed.  
1. Select the dictionary icon  
The dictionary opens.  
.
Bookmark view – where the words you have saved are  
displayed. Depending on the settings, the information is  
displayed horizontally or vertically.  
2. Enter a word in the input box.  
– When entering an English word, the word can be entered  
letter by letter. The English index is shown. The index  
changes when the input changes.  
The explanation content includes:  
– When entering a Chinese word, the Chinese index is  
shown.  
Headword.  
Phonetic symbol.  
– The general index shows the next closest entry to the  
entered word.  
Part of speech (for example verb, noun, English - Chinese  
dictionary only).  
3. Select an entry in the index.  
Grammatical variation (optional, English - Chinese  
dictionary only).  
The brief explanation of the word is displayed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dictionary  
127  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
4. To view the detailed description of the word, select the detail  
view button  
1. Enter a word where one or more letters are substituted for  
wildcard characters. The question mark (?) represents any  
one character, and the asterisk (*) represents any number of  
characters.  
.
5. To view the detailed description of an underlined word in the  
description, select the word.  
2. Select the search button  
.
6. To go back and forward between the detailed views, select  
the navigation buttons  
.
To look up bookmarked words  
To look up previously entered words  
Select the bookmark view button  
.
1. Select the drop-down box at the input box.  
2. A history list of previously entered words is displayed.  
3. Select one of the words in the list.  
History record and bookmarks  
To clear the history list  
To use fuzzy search  
Normal search returns the words in the list that are  
alphabetically closest to the input word. Fuzzy search returns  
the words whose spelling is closest to the input word.  
Select Edit > Clear history.  
To add a word to the bookmark list  
Note Fuzzy search can only be used when searching the  
1. Look up a word, following the instructions given above.  
dictionary with English words.  
2. Select the add to bookmark button  
.
1. Perform a normal search.  
To delete Bookmarks  
2. Select the search button  
.
1. Select the bookmarks to delete, by clicking to the right of the  
bookmark. If all bookmarks are to be deleted, select Edit >  
Select all.  
To use wildcards  
Note Wildcards can only be used when searching the dictionary  
with English words.  
2. Select Dictionary > Delete bookmark  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
128  
Dictionary  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
4. Select the number of words in the history drop-down list.  
Dictionary database  
5. Select Done  
.
You can use four databases:  
To move the line between the index and description  
1. Press and hold the stylus on the line.  
2. Move the line as required.  
One English - Chinese database and one Chinese - English  
database in the telephone.  
One English - Chinese database and one Chinese - English  
database in the external storage.  
To update a database  
You update the database from the PC using the PC software.  
After the update, information on the database is displayed.  
To delete a database  
1. Select Edit > Delete database  
.
2. Select the database to delete.  
3. Select Delete.  
Settings  
To set-up Dictionary  
1. Select Edit >Preferences  
.
2. Select if you want the general and bookmark views tiled  
horizontally or vertically.  
3. Select the desired sort order for the bookmarks.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dictionary  
129  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
ADVANCED FUNCTIONS  
PC Suite and multimedia for P908  
Installation of the PC Suite for P908  
The PC Suite for P908 programs can be used with Windows ME,  
98, 2000 and XP.  
PC Suite for P908  
The PC Suite for P908 CD delivered with your P908 contains a set  
of useful applications to install applications and manage your  
P908:  
When inserting the CD in the PC, a start menu is automatically  
shown. Select language and then start the PC Suite for P908 Setup  
Follow the instructions in the installation wizard.  
.
Synchronization – Synchronization of Calendar, Notes,  
Contacts and Tasks against MS-Outlook, Lotus Notes and  
Lotus Organizer.  
If the start menu is not automatically shown, use the Run  
command in the Windows Start menu to start Start.exe from your  
CD drive.  
Backup and Restore – Make safety copies of your data via  
SyncStation.  
File Manager – Transfer files (images, documents, music) via  
Windows Explorer between your P908 and PC.  
By default the PC Suite for P908 is accessed from Start menu >  
Programs > Sony Ericsson > P908.  
Install software – Install applications in the P908.  
The Setup application also can be used later to add or delete  
components.  
Dial-Up Networking Wizard – Wizard for GPRS and HSCSD  
settings for using your P908 as a modem.  
You can download the latest PC Suite software from  
www.SonyEricsson.com.cn  
User Guide – Manual for your P908.  
Quick Guide – Quick Guide for your P908.  
Drivers – Drivers for modem and the USB cable connected  
SyncStation.  
Refer to the online help for each specific application.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
130  
PC Suite and multimedia for P908  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Multimedia for P908  
The Multimedia for P908 CD contains a number of applications  
and files to be installed in, or downloaded to, your P908 and  
used together with its applications.  
Games.  
Audio files.  
Pictures.  
Video clips.  
MMS templates.  
Opening the Multimedia CD for P908  
When you insert the CD in the PC, a start menu opens  
automatically. Select an item from the menu and follow the  
instructions on the PC screen.  
If the start menu is not automatically shown, use the Run  
command in the Windows Start menu to start CDBrowser.exe from  
your CD drive.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PC Suite and multimedia for P908  
131  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Installing applications  
It is possible to install new applications in your P908. These  
applications can be obtained in several ways, for example:  
at their own risk. Product failures caused by applications not  
approved or made for Sony Ericsson will not be covered by your  
warranty.  
from the Internet.  
from a CD.  
from a Memory Stick Duo.  
as an e-mail attachment.  
from other devices.  
Installing applications on your  
P908  
There are two types of installation files for applications:  
Installation file security  
SIS (Symbian Standard Installation) made for P908 or other  
Sony Ericsson devices.  
Installation files in SIS format are typically used for installation  
of Epoc or PersonalJava ™ applications or other content into the  
P908 file system.The vendor who prepared the SIS file decides  
where in the file system the various content of the SIS file will  
be installed. This means that you need to decide if you trust that  
the SIS file does not contain harmful content. If you know for  
sure who produced the SIS file then you can take an installation  
decision based on what you know about that vendor. Your P908  
supports cryptographic verification of vendor identity.  
MIDP JAR (Mobile Information Device Profile Java  
Archive).  
Note SIS and JAR files are installation packages containing one  
or several files.  
This chapter also applies to other types of software to install, for  
example, system components and add-ons.  
During installation the P908 verifies a digital signature and  
certificate in the SIS file against a root certificate in the phone.  
Successful verification means that you can trust who produced  
the SIS file and that the content has not been modified after it  
was created. If the SIS file does not contain a digital signature  
Applications from developers outside Sony Ericsson, so-called  
third-party developers, might be able to be installed in the P908.  
Applications which are not approved by Sony Ericsson are not  
guaranteed to work correctly or securely, and users install them  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
132  
Installing applications  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
you will be given a warning about the problem but you can still  
decide to proceed with installation at your own risk. In general it  
is recommended that you install only from SIS files where the  
vendor identity and file integrity can be verified.  
5. Installation starts when the download is complete.  
From the P908  
Program packages, for example, games, can also be downloaded  
to your P908 from the Internet or from a Memory Stick Duo.  
When downloading a file from the Internet, the installation will  
start automatically when the file is completely downloaded to  
your P908. The procedure below describes installation of  
application packages already in the P908 but not yet installed.  
Note Installation of uncertified applications may cause your  
system to crash and all your data will then be lost.  
MIDP applications run in a protected environment with no  
access to sensitive information so no signatures are required for  
MIDP JAR files.  
See ‘To download and upload files, for example, applications’  
on page 80 for information about how to download files from  
the Internet.  
From a PC  
PC Suite for P908 must be installed in your PC and the P908 must  
be connected to the PC via SyncStation, infrared, or Bluetooth  
wireless technology in order to install applications from your  
PC.  
Installing applications in the P908  
1. Select  
.
2. From the menu, select Applications > Install  
.
Installing applications from your PC  
3. Select the software from the list.  
1. Connect your P908 to the PC via SyncStation, infrared or  
Bluetooth wireless technology. When connected, an icon is  
shown in the status area to the right in the taskbar on the PC.  
4. Select Install. If the software is certified, an information  
dialogue will be shown with the name of the software,  
version and supplier. Select Install again.  
2. Start the PC software Install Software and select the  
5. Now, depending on the software, you may be prompted to  
replace a previous installation, select language, memory  
location and select other installation options.  
application (.sis file) to install.  
3. Confirm to install the application in the P908.  
4. Select target drive (phone memory or Memory Stick Duo).  
Download to the P908 begins.  
6. Installation is complete. Select Done.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing applications  
133  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Removing applications from  
your P908  
It is sometimes necessary to remove installed applications and  
user data to free up memory.  
Removing applications in the P908  
1. Select  
.
2. From the menu, select Applications > Uninstall  
.
3. Select the application to be uninstalled.  
4. Select Uninstall  
5. Tap Yes to confirm.  
6. Select Done  
.
.
Tip See also ‘Master reset’ on page 167 and ‘Storage manager’  
on page 168 in Control Panel for more options regarding removal  
of applications and user data.  
Some removed applications could be reinstalled from the PC  
Suit for the P908 and the multimedia CD.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
134  
Installing applications  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Connecting to other devices  
Your P908 can be connected to other devices with similar  
interfaces such as PCs, other P908s and handheld computers.  
PC connectivity software  
Your P908 is delivered with a CD, PC Suite for P908. This  
software must be installed in the PC you want to connect to. See  
‘Installing applications’ on page 132 for more information. You  
do not need to install the PC Suite for P908 if you only want to  
perform beaming with the PC or use a cordless headset.  
The connection can be made via:  
Bluetooth wireless technology (not together with  
Windows 98)  
Cable  
Infrared (IrDA)  
Connection via SyncStation  
Once it has been connected, you can perform various tasks,  
depending on what type of connection you have chosen, such as:  
Connect the SyncStation to your PC with the USB cable. A  
wizard helps you to install the USB cable the first time. The PC  
Suite for P908 CD contains necessary software.  
Using a cordless headset (Bluetooth wireless technology)  
Sending and receiving files via (infrared, Bluetooth wireless  
technology) – ‘beaming’  
Put your P908 in the SyncStation. A new wizard starts which  
helps you to connect your P908 if this is the first time.  
appears in the status area to the right on the taskbar when  
the P908 is connected.  
Making Backup/Restore and Synchronization of your data  
and file transfer. (Cable, infrared and Bluetooth wireless  
technology)  
When connecting via cable, the P908 can be set in PC Connect  
mode or Modem mode. The setting is made in Control panel >  
Connections > Cable, see ‘Cable’ on page 154.  
Using the P908 as a modem for Dial-Up Networking.  
(Cable, infrared and Bluetooth wireless technology)  
Set the P908 in PC connect mode for  
Synchronization  
Installation of software  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to other devices  
135  
         
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Backup and restore  
To activate the infrared port on the PC  
1. Right click  
in the status area to the right on the taskbar.  
Set the P908 in Modem mode when using  
2. Select Properties  
P908 as a modem  
3. Select the Infrared check box  
Dial-up network wizard  
4. Click Close  
.
You should disable the USB cable connection in these three  
cases. In your PC select Start > Settings > Control Panel > Phone  
Monitor Options > COM Ports and disable the COM port to  
which the cable is connected.  
Note Clear the Infrared check box when ready.  
Send and receive  
You can send items via the infrared port, beam, in any  
application if there is a Send as command. To send, select  
Infrared. If you receive a beamed item, a dialogue box appears  
Connection via Infrared port  
with three options: Delete  
View opens the associated application which shows the item;  
Done saves it in the Beamed folder in Messages  
,
View or Done. Delete deletes the item;  
When connecting via the infrared port, make sure that both  
devices are placed within one metre from each other and that the  
infrared ports have a free line of sight between them.  
.
Both your P908 and the device you connect to must have their  
infrared ports activated before communication can begin.  
Connection via Bluetooth  
wireless technology  
To activate the infrared port on the P908  
1. Go to Control panel > Connections > Infrared  
.
You can connect your P908 to other products equipped with  
Bluetooth wireless technology, for example PCs or other mobile  
phones, and exchange data. Since Bluetooth wireless technology  
is radio-based, there does not have to be a free line of sight  
between transmitting and receiving devices. This means that  
2. Set the P908 to PC connect or Modem as required.  
3. Set the port state to On or On for 10 minutes.  
You can also change the infrared port state with the Flip closed,  
in the Connections application.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
136  
Connecting to other devices  
         
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
your P908 can stay in your pocket while communicating.  
However, items between transmitting and receiving devices  
Pairing  
might weaken the signal.  
To let your P908 initiate pairing with another device, such as a  
headset  
Connection to another device can be made within a range of up  
to 10 metres. Obstructions between the transmitting devices will  
have an effect on the performance. For all tasks, except  
1. In Control panel > Connections> Bluetooth > Settings, set Operation  
mode to On.  
beaming, it is necessary that you first set up a permanent and  
trusted relationship between your P908 and the other device.  
This process is called pairing (other documentation may refer to  
it as bonding). The paired devices are remembered by your P908  
even after you have turned it off so you do not need to repeat the  
process for every connection with those devices. The reason for  
pairing is to simplify future connections and to make them  
secure – only paired devices can connect to your P908.  
2. Set the other device to be on or discoverable.  
3. In the Devices tab, tap Add. Your P908 searches for all devices  
in the vicinity and lists them.  
– All enabled devices that are visible to others within range,  
are shown with their name and icon. You can use Show: to  
restrict the list to one category (only PC, for example).  
– Paired devices that are within range are shown with  
regular text.  
– Non-paired devices that are within range are shown with  
Activating Bluetooth wireless technology  
Activate Bluetooth wireless technology on your P908 in Control  
panel > Connections > Bluetooth > Settings. Set Operation mode to On  
and set if your P908 should be Visible by other devices or not. See  
‘Bluetooth’ on page 153 for more information on Bluetooth  
wireless technology settings.  
their names in italics.  
– Devices that are within range but unknown are shown  
with a preset name.  
,
4. Select the device you want your P908 to pair with, and enter  
a passcode when asked for it. When the passcode is accepted,  
the pairing process is complete, see ‘Passcodes’ on page 138.  
The Bluetooth wireless technology operation mode can also be  
changed with the Flip closed, through the Connections  
application. When the Bluetooth wireless technology is  
5. If in the future you want to allow a paired device to connect  
to your P908 without you explicitly approving each  
connection, you should select Control panel > Connections >  
Bluetooth > Devices, then select a device and the check box  
activated,  
appears on the screen and the left indicator on top  
of your P908 flashes blue.  
Allow to connect without confirmation  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to other devices  
137  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To let another device initiate pairing with your P908  
4. In the Devices tab tap Add. Your P908 searches for all devices  
in the vicinity and lists them.  
1. In Control panel > Connections > Bluetooth > Settings, set  
Operation mode to On  
.
5. When asked for a passcode, enter the headphone’s passcode  
on your P908.  
2. Follow the other device’s manual to initiate pairing.  
6. If in the future you want to allow the headphone to connect to  
your P908 without you explicitly approving each connection,  
you should select Control panel > Connections > Bluetooth >  
Devices, select the headphone and the check box Allow to  
3. When asked for a passcode, enter the same on both devices.  
4. If in the future you want to allow a paired device to connect  
to your P908 without you explicitly approving each  
connection you should select Control panel > Connections >  
Bluetooth > Devices, select a device and the check box Allow to  
connect without confirmation  
.
connect without confirmation  
.
To remove a paired device from your P908  
Select a device in the list and select Remove  
.
Tip You can change the name of a paired device. When you pair  
with other Bluetooth wireless technology enabled phones, it is  
very useful to include the user's name as part of the device  
name. This will make it very easy to beam information to the  
desired recipients.  
Passcodes  
Passcodes ensure that the device you pair with really is the  
device you think it is. A passcode is a set of numbers and/or  
letters (at least four characters) that you agree to exchange with  
the owner of the other device. Simply agree a passcode with the  
other user and each enter the same code into both devices when  
asked for it. The actual code is up to you; the important thing is  
that you both enter the same code. Accessories like headsets  
often have a default passcode, usually ‘0000’, see the specific  
user guide.  
To let a headphone initiate pairing with your P908  
1. Check that the device you want to pair with your P908:  
– Is on and within range.  
– Has its Bluetooth function activated and that it is in  
visible mode.  
2. In Control panel > Connections > Bluetooth > Settings, set  
Operation mode to On  
.
3. Follow the headphone’s manual to initiate pairing on the  
headphone.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
138  
Connecting to other devices  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Send and receive  
You can send items via Bluetooth wireless technology in any  
application if there is a Send as command. To send, select  
Bluetooth. If you receive an item via Bluetooth wireless  
technology, a dialogue box appears with three options: Delete  
Delete deletes the item; View opens the associated  
application which shows the item; Done saves it in the Beamed  
folder in Messages  
,
View or Done  
.
.
Bluetooth share  
You can make it possible for other users to transfer items from  
your P908. To make an item accessible, select Send as > Bluetooth  
Shared. The item is then copied to the Shared folder, accessible  
by other users. When a user requests to access your Shared  
folder, a request dialogue is shown, where you can Accept or  
Reject the transfer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to other devices  
139  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Synchronization and backup  
With PC Suite for P908 installed in your PC, your P908 can  
synchronize with the following PC applications, also called  
Local synchronization  
Personal Information Managers (PIMs):  
Lotus® Organizer® 5 & 6  
Lotus® Notes® 5.0, 6  
Bluetooth  
IrDA  
Microsoft® Outlook® 98, 2000, 2002  
Synchronization is divided into local and remote. Local  
synchronization is performed directly to a connected PC while  
remote synchronization is done over the air with a remote server  
in, for example, a corporate network.  
Cable  
The manual describes the easiest way to perform the tasks but  
you can also carry out most of them by selecting Start > Programs  
> Sony Ericsson > P908 in the PC and then select the desired  
command.  
Local synchronization is done with either cable, infrared or  
Bluetooth wireless technology. The functionality is the same.  
E-mail, Contacts, Calendar, Tasks, and Jotter notes (only text)  
can be synchronized locally.  
Refer to the online help find in Help in the menu bar in the PC  
software to get more information about synchronization and  
backup.  
Local synchronization settings  
Local synchronization is initiated from the PC and all settings  
are made in the P908 PC software (included on the PC Suite for  
P908 CD).  
Note If you have imported SIM phone book entries into Contacts  
in your P908, these entries will not be synchronized with the  
corresponding entries in your PC when synchronising your  
P908 and PC. You will instead get duplicates in your P908.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
140  
Synchronization and backup  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
The easiest way to synchronize is to set the Synchronization to  
automatically make a synchronization every time your P908 is  
connected.  
2. In the PC, click on  
on the PC taskbar and select  
Synchronise  
.
The synchronization starts.  
3. After a short time, the PC application you want to  
synchronize with might ask you to allow the P908 access to  
it. Answer Yes and the synchronization continues.  
To make the synchronization settings  
In the PC, click on  
in the status area to the right in the  
taskbar on the PC and select Sync Station Settings  
.
A dialogue appears where you can make the synchronization  
settings. Click Help in the dialogue to get more information  
about the settings.  
Remote synchronization  
Remote synchronization takes place over the air and is the ideal  
way to keep the P908 up-to-date while on the move. Using  
GPRS, the P908 can be continuously connected to the remote  
synchronization server.  
Making a local synchronization  
To make an automatic synchronization  
1. Connect your P908 via SyncStation, infrared or Bluetooth  
wireless technology. For more information, see ‘Connecting  
to other devices’ on page 135.  
GPRS, HSCSD  
or CSD  
2. Synchronization starts automatically.  
3. After a short time, the PC application you want to  
synchronize with might ask you to allow the P908 access to  
it. Answer Yes and the synchronization continues.  
PIM Application  
Sync Server  
Firewall  
To make a manual synchronization  
1. Connect your P908 via cable, infrared or Bluetooth wireless  
technology. For more information, see ‘Connecting to other  
devices’ on page 135.  
Internet/Intranet  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Synchronization and backup  
141  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Synchronization services may be offered by mobile operators,  
third-party service providers and as added capability to  
corporate PIM applications.  
3. Fill in the Task name or leave default.  
4. Fill in the Server database (contact your corporate  
information services help desk or your service provider).  
Contacts, Calendar, and Tasks can be synchronized remotely.  
5. The item you selected to be synchronized is now above the  
divider in the list. (Disabled items are below the divider.)  
Repeat for other items.  
Remote synchronization settings  
To configure the remote synchronization server  
Making a remote synchronization  
In Applications, select  
Remote Sync > Edit > Preferences and fill  
Open Applications > Remote Sync and tap the Sync button.  
in the following parameters:  
When ready, the Task status column shows today's date for all  
successfully synchronized items.  
– Server address  
– Username  
– Password  
You might also need to fill in whether to use transport login  
under the Protocol tab. Contact your corporate information  
services help desk or your service provider for information on  
these parameters.  
You can use the P908 Backup and Restore PC software to back up  
the contents stored in your P908 to your computer. Keeping  
backups of your P908 contents on your computer means that  
you have a separate copy of the contents of the P908, which can  
be restored into the P908. Backups should be made on a regular  
basis. See the online help for P908 Backup and Restore for more  
information on how to use the application.  
You also need to have at least one configured Internet account  
that remote sync can use to connect, see ‘Internet accounts’ on  
page 155.  
To select items to synchronise  
Note All user data will be deleted when the P908 software is  
upgraded by a Service Partner. Always back up your data before  
handing over the P908 for upgrading, so that you can restore it  
afterwards  
1. In Remote Sync, select one item in the list you want to be  
synchronized.  
2. Select the Enable task check box.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
142  
Synchronization and backup  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Preconditions  
The PC Suite for P908 must be installed in the PC and the P908  
must be connected to the PC via cable.  
Restoring data  
Lost data or accidentally deleted information in your P908 can  
be restored from an earlier backup. A backup from the phone  
can only be restored to the phone, and a backup from a Memory  
Stick can only be restored to a Memory Stick.  
Note Backup and restore does not work via infrared or  
Bluetooth wireless technology.  
To restore a backup  
Performing a backup  
1. Turn on your P908 and connect it to the PC via cable.  
2. In the PC, click on  
on the PC taskbar and select Back up  
To make a backup  
and restore  
.
1. Turn on your P908 and connect it to the PC via cable.  
3. Select your P908 in the menu that appears. Several P908s can  
be backed up to the same PC.  
2. In the PC, click on  
on the PC taskbar and select Back up  
and restore  
.
4. Select one of the backups in the list of previously saved  
3. Select your P908 in the menu that appears. Several P908s can  
be backed up to the same PC.  
backups and click Restore  
.
5. Click Yes and follow the instructions in the PC and in the  
4. Select Backup and choose what to back up: P908 and/or  
P908.  
Memory Stick.  
6. The restore is complete.  
5. Click Yes and follow the instructions in the PC and in the  
P908.  
Note Everything in your P908 will be overwritten by the chosen  
backup. Once you have clicked Yes to start the restore, you  
cannot cancel the procedure.  
6. The backup is complete.  
Note If you have used your Secure Tokens (Secure Access files)  
since you made your backup, you must reconfigure these. If you  
restore another P908, you must reconfigure your Secure Tokens.  
For more information see ‘Secure tokens’ on page 167.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Synchronization and backup  
143  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
SETTINGS  
Personalizing your P908  
There are a number of ways you can give your P908 a personal  
Setting a background picture  
touch and change its settings to suit your requirements.  
You can change the background image (wallpaper) for the  
standby screen in  
Control panel > Device > Display. You can use  
any image stored internally or on a Memory Stick Duo.  
Themes  
Tip More background images can be found on the Multimedia  
P908 CD, delivered with your P908.  
Themes control the colour of screen and text, the icons, and the  
background picture. Sound themes control the notification  
alerts. Four themes are pre-loaded in the P908. Extra themes can  
be found on the Multimedia for P908 CD.  
You can obtain suitable background picture files by  
downloading, MMS, beaming using Bluetooth or infrared, or  
transferring them using a cable from your PC.  
To change the theme, select  
see ‘Themes’ on page 151  
Control panel > Device > Themes,  
.
Background picture images are 208 x 144 pixels and the picture  
can be seen in the standby screen.(Any chosen picture will be  
scaled to fit the screen).The images can be JPEG, GIF, BMP,  
WBMP, MBM or PNG format.  
Changing your application  
shortcuts  
You can change and rearrange the five shortcuts to applications,  
shown in the standby screen when the Flip is closed, and the five  
first shortcuts in the Application picker area in Flip open (not  
Setting a screen saver  
You can set a screen saver picture to be displayed after a period  
of inactivity. See ‘Display’ on page 147. Key lock and device  
lock may be used in combination with the screen saver. When  
you press a key or touch the screen, you will be prompted to  
activate keys and/or enter the device lock code.  
the Application launcher  
even be hidden, if you wish.  
). The Flip closed shortcuts can  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
144  
Personalizing your P908  
                     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
The images can be JPEG, GIF (including animated), BMP,  
WBMP, MBM or PNG format. Image format for the screen  
saver is 208 x 320 pixels.  
To choose the contact’s picture size  
1. Select  
Phone > Edit >Preferences > Incoming call picture  
.
2. Select the Show large pop-up picture for incoming calls check  
Note Using animated GIF uses more power.  
box.  
3. Tap Done  
.
Adding images to your  
Contacts  
Ring signals  
Your P908 can play both iMelody format and polyphonic ring  
signals in WAV, AU, AMR, MIDI, RMF, and MP3 sound file  
formats. When you choose a ring signal, your P908 will scan the  
internal and Memory Stick storage and present you with a list of  
ring signals that are in these formats. Recordings you have made  
using Sound Recorder can also be selected.  
You can store a picture with  
each entry in Contacts. See  
11:03  
‘Creating and editing  
contacts’ on page 102.  
J
+
ohn  
S
mith  
4613244500  
(h)  
Pictures are easily taken  
using the CommuniCorder  
(see ‘CommuniCorder’ on  
page 61) though of course  
other images can be used.  
Ring signals can be added by downloading from the Internet,  
beaming using infrared or Bluetooth wireless technology file  
transfer from a PC and by using a Memory Stick. Extra ring  
signals can be found on the Multimedia for P908 CD-ROM. You  
can add as many ring signals as desired, subject only to  
available storage space.  
E
nd call  
If your network operator  
provides a CLI (Calling Line Identity) service, your P908 can  
display the contact’s picture together with the other information  
when an incoming call is received with a CLI matching that  
contact (not all numbers can be displayed). The contact’s picture  
is also displayed when you make a call to that person.  
Tip Sound Recorder recordings are listed as voicenote and a  
number, for example voicenote1470.  
A ring signal may be selected for an entry in Contacts, so that  
the caller can be identified by the ring signal that is played. See  
To personalize the ring melody for a contact’ on page 103.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Personalizing your P908  
145  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Note The mobile network must provide the CLI (Calling Line  
Identity) of the caller to enable the contact to be identified.  
Note If you use an audio file as alarm or notification signal, it  
will be played using the Multimedia volume setting. The ring  
volume setting will not effect the sound volume.  
You may change the default ring signal that is played in all other  
cases. To do this, see ‘Sounds and alerts’ on page 149.  
Note If your P908 finds that you have renamed, moved or  
deleted a ring signal, it will play the default instead.  
Note If you use an audio file as ring signal, it will be played  
using the Multimedia volume setting. The ring volume setting  
will not effect the sound volume.  
Alarm tones and sound  
notification  
You can choose different sounds for alarms and notifications in  
these applications:  
Time  
See ‘Setting alarms’ on page 120.  
Calendar  
Set a sound for reminder alerts, see ‘Preferences’  
on page 109).  
Tasks  
Set a sound for reminder alarms. See ‘Preferences’  
on page 112.  
Messages  
Set a different sound for each type of message as  
notification of a new message:  
See ‘Sounds and alerts’ on page 149.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
146  
Personalizing your P908  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Control panel  
The Control Panel is the location for all the main settings on  
your P908 that are system-wide and affect more than one  
application. This is the main place to go to initially set up your  
P908, and to change settings at any point thereafter. To access it,  
shown. If you feel that the Flip closed shortcuts obscure your  
background, you can choose to have them hidden when you do  
not need them.  
To change an application shortcut  
select  
Applications >  
Control panel.  
1. In the Application shortcuts dialogue, select the Flip open or Flip  
Tip You can find settings that apply to a single application in  
the Preferences menu of the application, for example: Phone > Edit  
> Preferences, CommuniCorder > CommuniCorder > Preferences,  
Internet > Edit > Preferences.  
closed tab depending on the shortcuts you intend to change.  
2. Select the icon you wish to change. The name of the  
application is shown in the Set application pick list.  
3. Choose the application you want to replace it with from the  
list.  
The sections below describe the settings available for each of  
the default items in the Control panel.  
To hide the Flip closed application shortcuts when your P908  
is inactive  
Clear the Shortcuts always displayed check box.  
THE DEVICE TAB  
The device tab contains settings related to the behaviour of your  
P908 device itself.  
Display  
Use the Display settings to control the screen and power  
functions of your P908.  
Application shortcuts  
Use this dialogue to configure the application shortcuts shown  
in the Flip closed Standby view, and the Application picker  
shortcuts in the Flip open mode. See ‘Standby view’ on page 15  
and ‘Navigation’ on page 16. You can change the five shortcuts  
Background tab  
You can set a picture to be background for the standby screen.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Control panel  
147  
           
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
1. Select if the Flip closed or Flip open background should be  
Power tab  
changed.  
You can set the screen light settings for car use and handheld  
use.  
2. Tap the image showing the current picture.  
3. Browse to see picture files available on your P908.  
Auto  
Light switches on when you tap the screen, press a key, or  
receive an incoming call  
4. Select a picture and tap Select  
.
On  
Off  
Light is always on  
Light is always off  
Read more about backgrounds in ‘Personalizing your P908’ on  
page 144.  
You can set if the power save should switch off the screen, blank  
the screen or show a clock on the screen. You can also set the  
power save time to 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 10, 15 and 30 minutes.  
Screen tab  
You can set a picture to be the screen saver.  
If you set times for both screen saver and power saver, the  
power saver time will commence after the screen saver is  
displayed.  
1. Select a picture for the screen saver.  
2. Set the activation time for the screen saver.  
If you select the Screen saver device lock check box the device  
lock will activate when the delay runs out. Read more about the  
device lock in ‘Device lock’ on page 40.  
Flight mode  
If you set a time for the Automatic Input Lock, the keyboard lock  
will activate when the time runs out. Read more about the  
automatic key lock in ‘Automatic key lock’ on page 41.  
In flight mode the radio function is turned off. You cannot make  
and receive calls but most of the other functions in the P908 are  
available.  
Occasionally you may find that you tap one item (for example a  
button or menu option) but another is activated. Calibrating the  
screen ensures that the correct item is activated.  
Use these settings to turn the flight mode on or off and also to  
activate the Power menu. When activated, the Power menu will  
ask you if you want to start the P908 in normal mode or flight  
mode each time you turn on the P908. Also, when you press the  
On/Off button when your P908 is on, the Power menu will ask  
you if you want to turn off the P908, or switch to another mode.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
148  
Control panel  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To activate the Power menu  
Select the Prompt me... check box and tap Done  
Locks  
.
Locks contains options for activating the locks on the device,  
the SIM card and the keys on the keypad, and for changing the  
lock codes, see ‘P908 locks’ on page 40.  
To cancel the selection of Power menu  
Clear the Prompt me... check box and tap Done  
.
Sounds and alerts  
International  
Use these settings to control sounds and alerts of your P908.  
Use these settings to set the locations shown in  
Time, as well  
as the units for distances, numerical separators, and how  
currency values should be shown.There are two tabs: Location  
and Numbers.  
Calls tab – Sets ring tones and volume.  
Messages tab – Sets notification alerts for messages.  
Other tab – Sets button and screen clicks, reminders, alarms,  
and other notifications.  
On the Location tab  
Set Current country/region and Current city to your current  
location.  
You can choose to use any sound recording or audio file. You can  
select ring signals that are stored on your local storage or on a  
Memory Stick. If the selected file is later deleted or moved, the  
Default Melody will be played instead.  
Set Other country/region and Other city to an alternative  
location (for example your home location if you are abroad).  
Note If you use an audio file as a ring tone, alarm or  
notification signal, it will be played using the Multimedia  
volume setting. The ring volume setting will not affect the sound  
volume.  
If the city you want is not listed, select another city in the  
desired time zone.  
On the Numbers tab  
Set the decimal separator and thousands separator you desire.  
To listen to the selected ringtone or alert  
1. Tap the  
icon to listen to the signal.  
2. Tap again to stop playback.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Control panel  
149  
         
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To change the default ring tone or alert  
Ring volume – Set the preferred sound level for handheld,  
handsfree and car use.  
1. Tap the drop-down menu.  
2. Select Default Melody for the P908 default or Find sound to  
Increasing ring – Select the checkbox to use increasing ring  
select a new one.  
signals. This disables the other volume settings.  
3. If required, change folder.  
4. Select the required sound  
Messages tab  
These settings set messaging alerts.  
5. Tap  
and  
to preview the sound.  
6. Tap Select to set this sound.  
Display notification message – Select the check box to receive  
notification of a received message.  
Warning! The volume may be uncomfortably loud at the  
higher volume levels if the phone is close to your ear. Exposure  
to excessive volume may damage hearing.  
SMS – Select an alert for received SMS messages.  
Email – Select an alert for received Email messages.  
MMS – Select an alert for received MMS messages.  
Note To set vibrating alert, silent mode, speakerphone or mute  
the microphone, tap the volume icon on the status bar.  
Area info – Select an alert for received area information  
messages.  
Calls tab  
These settings set incoming call alerts. For more information see  
Auto setup – Select an alert for auto setup messages.  
‘Ring signals’ on page 145.  
Other tab  
You may personalize the ring melodies further for individual  
contacts, see ‘To change the details of a contact’ on page 104.  
These settings set button and screen clicks, reminders, alarms,  
and other notifications.  
Ring (voice) – Select a ring signal for incoming voice calls.  
Button clicks – Select the sound used when you press a key on  
Ring (voice) line 2 – Select a ring signal for incoming voice  
the keypad.  
calls.  
Screen taps – Select the sound used when you tap the screen.  
Ring (data) – Select a ring signal for incoming data calls.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
150  
Control panel  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Reminder – Select an alert to be played for reminders.  
Themes  
Voice Messages – Select an alert to be played for voice  
messages.  
You can set the look of the user interface by changing the theme.  
To change the theme, select a theme from the list. The picture  
shows the Flip closed standby background. Tap Select  
Default alarm sound – Select the default alarm sound.  
.
To change sound, select from the drop-down list. Tap the  
trumpet to listen to the sound. Tap again to stop playback.  
Text input  
To send a theme, select the theme and tap Send as  
.
There are several standard ways of entering text in your P908.  
See ‘Entering text with the Flip closed’ on page 31 and  
‘Entering text with the Flip open’ on page 34.  
To delete a theme, select the theme and tap Delete  
.
Use the settings on the Primary  
set methods for entering text in your P908.  
,
Alternative and Flip Closed tabs to  
Time & date  
Adjusting the time and date here sets these throughout your  
P908.  
Primary  
The method that you select here is activated  
automatically when you need to enter text into your  
P908.  
The dialogue has three tabs. You can set:  
Alternative  
Flip closed  
The method that you select here is activated if you  
Time & date  
The current time and date. Here you can also turn  
Summertime (daylight saving time) on or off for your  
location.  
tap  
at the bottom of the screen.  
The method that you select here is activated when you  
need to enter text with the Flip closed.  
Format  
Specify how you want the time and date to be displayed  
on the screen.  
If you load other text input software, select it and adjust its  
settings here.  
Workdays  
Specify the days in your working week.  
Note These settings are also available in the  
Time  
application.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Control panel  
151  
         
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Time & date tab  
Format tab  
You can specify how you want the time and date to be displayed  
on the screen, and if you want to use the 12-hour (am/pm) or 24-  
hour time format.  
To set the current date  
1. On the Time & date tab, select the date. A calendar view opens.  
Tap the arrows to set the current year and month.  
To set the time and date display format  
1. Select Date format and choose a format.  
2. Select Date separator and choose a separator.  
2. Select the current date.  
To set the current time  
1. On the Time & date tab, select the time. Select the upper half of  
the hour or minute box to increase the number displayed, or  
the lower half to decrease the number.  
3. Select a Time format  
4. Select Time separator choose a separator.  
5. Select Done  
.
.
2. Select the am/pm box.  
This is only possible if you use the 12-hour time format.  
Workdays tab  
3. Confirm by tapping outside the time picker.  
You can specify what days you work, if, for example, you want  
to set an alarm that sounds only on workdays. You can also  
specify the first day of your week to customise the display of  
both Week and Month views in Calendar.  
If the locations you have set under  
Control panel >  
International are in a country/region that currently has  
summertime (daylight saving time), you can adjust the time and  
date.  
To turn daylight saving time on  
User greeting  
1. On the Time &date tab, select Summertime, select the check  
Your P908 can show a user greeting on the standby screen when  
you turn it on. Use this dialogue to turn this function on or off.  
You can define your own user greeting text (up to 32  
characters).  
boxes for the zones that currently have daylight saving time.  
2. Select Done  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
152  
Control panel  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Tip You will probably find that the preset name of your P908,  
and of devices you pair it with, are not very meaningful or easily  
recognisable. It is a good idea to change these names to  
something more useful. The name you choose for your P908  
THE CONNECTIONS TAB  
The connections tab contains settings related to how your P908  
communicates with other devices.  
appears on any devices you pair it with.  
See ‘Pairing’ on page 137 for instructions on how to connect to  
another device using Bluetooth wireless technology.  
Bluetooth  
Bluetooth wireless technology uses radio waves to enable  
wireless connections between your P908 and other Bluetooth-  
Security  
enabled devices. This method of linking works well at a range of  
up to 10 metres. Obstructions between the transmitting devices  
will have an effect on the performance. Read more about  
connecting to other devices using Bluetooth wireless technology  
in ‘Connection via Bluetooth wireless technology’ on page 136.  
On the Settings tab you can set the Bluetooth security related  
settings of your P908.  
Bluetooth on  
All Bluetooth wireless technology functionality from  
your P908 works. Visibility according to the Visible  
to other devices setting.  
Bluetooth settings are shown on two tabs:  
Set Bluetooth to Off if you do not use Bluetooth, it  
will decrease battery drain. Bluetooth will  
automatically switch on if you use Send as >  
Bluetooth from the applications  
Settings  
• A device name for your P908.  
• Bluetooth on or off.  
• If it should be visible to other Bluetooth equipped  
devices.  
Visible to  
other devices  
Yes: All Bluetooth wireless technology functionality  
from your P908 works.  
Devices  
A list of all the Bluetooth-enabled devices that your  
P908 is paired (bonded) with.  
• To change the name of a device, and to allow for  
connection without confirmation, select the name in  
the list.  
No: All Bluetooth wireless technology functionality  
from your P908 works but you cannot receive  
beamed items, and other devices cannot initiate  
pairing with your P908. You cannot use your P908 as  
a modem, it is not possible to connect from a PC and  
voice dialling from a headset is not possible.  
• To remove a device from the list, select the name and  
select Remove  
• To locate other devices in the vicinity, and add them to  
the list, tap Add  
.
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Control panel  
153  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Cable  
GSM Networks  
Use Cable to set the cable connection mode and the connection  
parameters used when communicating through your P908's  
cable port.  
This option lets you choose what net to use when you are  
outside your operator’s area. Choose if you want to search for a  
new network or use a preferred one. You can also make a list of  
preferred networks.  
Set the cable connection mode. Please note that you must set  
the mode to Modem when using the P908 as a modem and  
when using the DUN (Dial-up Networking) Wizard.  
Search mode – Select between automatic or manual search for  
a network.  
Set the baud rate, parity, number of stop bits, character length  
and type of flow control required for the connection. When  
connecting your P908 via the desk stand to a USB port on  
your PC, use the following (default) settings:  
Select network – Tap the button to get a list of available  
networks.  
New search – Tap the button to search for available networks.  
Preferred list – Show the networks that your P908 will search  
for when you are outside your home network.  
Baud rate  
115200  
None  
Parity  
Stop bits  
1
8
Note Your operator may not allow you to access all available  
networks.  
Character length  
Flow control  
CTS/RTS  
To add a network to the preferred list  
Tip You can set the cable connection mode when the Flip is  
1. Tap Add network  
.
closed by selecting  
Applications >  
Connections >  
Cable.  
2. Select a network from the displayed list.  
3. Select a position in the Preferred list and tap Done  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
154  
Control panel  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
There are three types of Internet account:  
Infrared  
Dial-Up  
:
For Dial-Up (CSD, Circuit Switched Data)  
connections, you are charged for the length of  
time that you are connected to the Internet.  
Use this setting to control the state of the infrared port of your  
P908.  
Set the infrared status to PC connect or Modem, as required.  
High-Speed Dial-Up  
:
For High-Speed Dial-Up (HSCSD, High Speed  
Circuit Switched Data) connections you are  
charged for the length of time you are  
connected but you can increase the connection  
speed so that information is transferred faster.  
You can set it Off On or On for 10 minutes. Read more about  
,
connecting to other devices using infrared in ‘Connection via  
Infrared port’ on page 136.  
The service must be included in your  
subscription and billing rates from your  
network operator may increase as you increase  
the connection speed.  
Internet accounts  
You access the Internet using an Internet Service Provider (ISP),  
who supplies you with account details including: a username, a  
password, and the phone number or Web site address that your  
P908 automatically uses to access the Internet. You need to set  
up an Internet account before you can:  
GPRS  
:
For a GPRS connection you are charged for the  
amount of information you view, download, or  
send.  
The dialogue has two tabs: Accounts and Other.  
Access Web pages and download multimedia messages.  
Accounts tab  
The Internet accounts dialogue lists all the Internet accounts that  
have been set up on your P908.  
Set up an e-mail account to send and receive e-mail  
messages.  
You can add a New account to the list and Edit or Delete an  
existing account.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Control panel  
155  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
If you want to select an Internet account every time you connect  
to the Internet, select the Show connection dialog check box. This  
New  
GPRS account  
For some accounts you may need to make advanced settings,  
provided by your ISP. Select Advanced and enter settings on the  
tabs as described below  
may be useful if you use different Internet accounts for  
Internet and  
Messages.  
Whenever you connect to the Internet, your Preferred account is  
the account that your P908 prompts you to use.  
GPRS Advanced tabs  
Server  
User name and password required  
Normally, you do not have to enter a username and  
password when you connect to a GPRS account.  
However, some service providers may require you to  
enter these details.  
If you select the Username and password required  
check box, but do not enter a username and  
password, you will be prompted to enter these when  
the P908 connects.  
To create a new Internet account  
1. On the Accounts tab, select New  
.
2. Give the account a name. This will be the name shown in  
your list of accounts. (In dialogues that appear while a  
connection is being established the text -GPRS is  
automatically added to names of GPRS accounts.)  
3. Choose the Connection type for the type of account that you  
Address  
want to create, GPRS or Dial-Up.  
Enter the Internet address of your access point. The  
address is supplied by your service provider.  
4. Continue entering settings as required. These will differ  
depending on the type of account: GPRS, Dial-Up or High-  
Speed Dial-Up:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
156  
Control panel  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
GPRS Advanced tabs  
GPRS Advanced tabs  
Log in  
The settings on this tab deal with IP and DNS  
addresses.  
Authentication is used by some network operators to  
identify the mobile phone connecting to their GPRS  
network. There are different methods, or protocols,  
for doing this.  
The DNS address uniquely identifies your Internet  
Service Provider (ISP)'s computers, which your P908  
uses to connect to the Internet. Your P908 can  
normally fetch these addresses automatically from  
most ISPs.  
If, after setting up an Internet account, you cannot  
connect to the Internet and you suspect these  
addresses are incorrect, ask your ISP for their  
primary and secondary DNS addresses.  
An IP address consists of four 3-digit boxes and valid  
input is between 000 and 255 in each box.  
Normal: PAP (Password Authentication Protocol).  
The user's username and password are transmitted  
over the network in an unencrypted form.  
Secure: CHAP (Challenge Handshake  
Authentication Protocol). The user's username and  
password are never transmitted over the network.  
None: No authentication is required by the network  
operator.  
QoS  
Check with your network operator before changing  
any of the QoS (Quality of Service) settings.  
If your operator supports the use of Header  
compression, selecting On can speed up your  
connection.  
Proxy  
Other  
A proxy server is a computer connected between  
your P908 and the computer you communicate with.  
This arrangement can be used for connections to  
Remote Sync servers, or within a company network.  
If this setting is needed, your company's Information  
Services department or Remote Sync provider must  
give you instructions.  
The settings Precedence Delay, Peak rate, and Mean  
,
Rate are all by default set to Subscribed, which  
means that your operators default QoS (Quality of  
Service) values will apply. Reliability is set as Class 3  
by default.  
If your ISP supports Point to Point Protocol (PPP)  
extensions, you can select the Enable PPP extensions  
check box. PPP extensions allow your P908 to  
provide features such as encryption, which increases  
the security of your Internet connection.  
New  
Dial-Up or High-Speed Dial-Up account  
Your Internet Service Provider (ISP) supplies you with your User  
name, your Password, and their Phone number, which your P908  
dials to connect to the Internet. If you have a High-Speed Dial-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Control panel  
157  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Up account with your network operator you can increase the  
Dial-Up and High-Speed Dial-Up Advanced tabs  
speed of your connection by making settings on the Speed tab  
Select the check box Post connect terminal if:  
• The login script of the account that you are setting up  
requires that you input certain information or you will  
need to respond to prompts from the Internet accounts.  
You are connecting to a Dial-Up account that uses Secure  
Access generated by a separate smart card or password  
generator.  
under Advanced  
.
Tip To avoid having to change the phone number when you  
travel abroad: enter the international dialling prefix (for  
example '+') and the appropriate country/region code for your  
ISP.  
Proxy  
Speed  
For an explanation of these settings, see Proxy in the  
‘GPRS Advanced tabs’ on page 156.  
For some accounts you may also need to make advanced  
settings.  
You can only increase the speed of your connection if you  
have a High-Speed Dial-Up account with your network  
operator.  
Select Advanced and enter settings on the tabs as described  
below  
Secure  
To enable secure access for this Internet account you  
must link it to a vendor-associated Secure Token in this  
dialogue:  
1. Select the Enable secure access check box.  
To create or delete Secure Tokens on your P908, select  
Dial-Up and High-Speed Dial-Up Advanced tabs  
Log in  
The settings on this tab deal with IP and DNS addresses.  
For an explanation of these settings, see Log in in the  
‘GPRS Advanced tabs’ on page 156.  
Script  
As an alternative to entering your username and password  
to access the Internet you may need to use a login script  
stored on your P908. Although uncommon, scripts may  
be required by your Internet Service Provider (ISP).  
Select the Use log in script check box and enter the script  
text in the Script editor  
Control panel > Other >Secure tokens  
.
2. Select the vendor and token names of the Secure Token  
that you want to link to this account from the drop-down  
lists.  
Other  
If your Internet Service Provider (ISP) supports Point to  
Point Protocol (PPP) extensions, you can select the  
Enable PPP extensions check box. PPP extensions allow  
your P908 to provide features such as encryption, which  
increases the security of your Internet connection.  
If you select the check box Plain text authentication  
(required by some ISPs), the security of your connection  
will decrease during the connection process. Once you  
are connected, the security of your connection will be  
restored.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
158  
Control panel  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To edit an Internet account  
example, during GPRS data transfer (Icon:  
not receive incoming calls. As soon as the transfer stops  
(Icon: ) incoming calls will be accepted.  
) your P908 may  
1. On the Accounts tab, select the account in the list.  
2. Select Edit  
3. Change your settings as desired.  
4. Select Done  
.
Setting the Preferred mode lets you choose how you want to use  
your P908:  
.
Select GPRS only if you do not want to be disturbed by  
incoming phone calls while browsing the Web. All incoming  
voice (and GSM data) calls are rejected. If you disconnect  
from the Internet, incoming calls can be received. Outgoing  
calls are possible, except during data transfer. This mode is  
useful if you are using sensitive Internet services, such as  
banking.  
Note If you change the Connection type, all account data for that  
account will be deleted.  
To delete an Internet account  
1. On the Accounts tab, select the account in the list.  
2. Select Delete  
.
3. Select Done  
.
If you select GSM only, your P908 will not be connected to the  
GPRS network. If you choose to download e-mail or browse  
the Web, your P908 will connect to GPRS only as long as is  
needed for the data connection.  
Other tab  
You can use the Dial-Up timeout and GPRS timeout settings to set  
up your P908 to disconnect automatically from the Internet, if  
you are not using it. The connection is broken after the period  
you specify has lapsed.  
If you select Automatic, your P908 will let you answer  
incoming GSM calls while having normal GPRS  
functionality. A GPRS data connection will be temporarily  
interrupted by a voice call.  
Preferred mode (bearer preference)  
Please note that your P908 can be used for either voice (or GSM  
data) calls or transferring GPRS data, but not both at the same  
time. It may, however, still be connected to GPRS. As an  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Control panel  
159  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Read more about the different types of messages in ‘Messages’  
on page 87.  
Messaging accounts  
The  
Messages application can handle many different types  
of messages, but you must first set up accounts and make  
settings as described below.  
Email tab  
The Email tab shows a list of the e-mail accounts on your  
P908.You can add a New account to the list and Edit or Delete an  
existing account.  
The Messaging accounts dialogue has four tabs, one for each  
type of messaging account:  
Email  
You can have any number of e-mail accounts. To receive  
and send e-mail, you must first set up an Internet account  
(if one is not already set up). See ‘Internet accounts’ on  
page 155.  
You can choose one of your e-mail accounts as Preferred. This  
will be the e-mail account that your P908 uses when you use  
Send as to send an entry as e-mail directly from one of your P908  
applications  
SMS  
MMS  
You can only have one SMS (Short Message Service)  
account.The settings on this tab also apply to EMS  
(Extended Message Service) messages.  
To create a new e-mail account  
1. On the Email tab, select New.  
You can only have one MMS (Multimedia Messaging  
Service) account. To receive MMS messages you must  
first set up Internet and WAP accounts (if not already set  
up). See‘Internet accounts’ on page 155.  
2. Enter the following settings on the tabs:  
E-mail account basic tab settings  
Account name  
Your name  
This is the name you give to your e-mail account.  
Area  
You can only have one Area info account. The number of  
Area Information channels that you can subscribe to is  
limited by the space on your SIM.  
This name appears on your outgoing e-mail  
messages.  
Email address  
Your Internet Service Provider (ISP) supplies you  
with your e-mail address.  
Tip A simple way of setting up an e-mail or multimedia  
message account is to ask your service provider to send you a  
message that contains the required information to create an  
account automatically on your P908.  
Connection type  
Internet account  
Select POP3 or IMAP. POP3 is most common.  
Select the Internet account to access your e-mail  
messages.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
160  
Control panel  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
E-mail account Inbox tab settings  
E-mail account Advanced tab settings  
User name  
Password  
Incoming server  
address  
Secure  
connection  
Your Internet Service Provider (ISP) supplies you  
with your username, your password, and its  
incoming server address, which identifies the  
computer where your incoming e-mail messages  
are stored.  
Your Internet Service Provider (ISP) will tell you  
whether you can use either a Secure connection or  
Secure password authentication  
.
Outgoing mail  
port  
Normally 25. Do not change unless your ISP  
instructs you to.  
Download  
Schedule  
If you want to limit the data traffic, you can choose  
to receive just Just headers (the sender, subject,  
and date only) or set a size limit (if a message is  
larger than the e-mails smaller than limit, only the  
headers are downloaded). You can download the  
complete message later.  
Use MIME  
encoding  
MIME encoding is a standard that allows non-  
textual information (for example graphics) and  
accented characters to be sent in e-mail messages.  
If you should not wish to Use MIME encoding  
,
clear the check box.  
Incoming mail  
port  
Normally 110. Do not change unless your ISP  
instructs you to.  
Select Schedule to schedule an automatic  
download of your incoming e-mail messages.  
Messages that are waiting in your Outbox will not  
be sent at the same time.  
Secure  
password  
authentication  
A secure connection means that all information  
(including your username, password, and all  
messages) is encrypted to maximise security while  
you are connected to the Internet. In contrast,  
secure password authentication means that only  
your password is encrypted.  
E-mail account Outbox tab settings  
Outgoing server  
address  
Your Internet Service Provider (ISP) supplies you  
with its Outgoing server address, which identifies  
the computer through which your outgoing e-mail  
messages are sent.  
To edit an e-mail account  
1. On the Email tab, select the account in the list.  
Use SMTP  
Some SMTP servers might also require  
authentication  
2. Select Edit  
3. Change your settings as desired.  
4. Select Done  
.
authentication when sending e-mail. In that case,  
select the check box Use SMTP authentication and  
enter your Username and Password  
.
.
Use Inbox login  
details  
If the SMTP server accepts using your Inbox login  
information for authentication, select the check  
box Use Inbox login details  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Control panel  
161  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To delete an e-mail account  
MMS tab  
1. On the Email tab, select the account in the list.  
2. Select Delete  
Use these settings to set up multimedia messaging:  
.
Messaging accounts MMS tab settings  
3. Select Done  
.
Service centre  
address  
The Service centre address is the URL to the server  
on which your multimedia messages are stored. Your  
MMS service provider or your network operator can  
provide you with the service centre address.  
SMS tab  
Use these settings to set up text message and EMS messaging:  
WAP account  
Automatic  
Specify which of your configured WAP accounts  
you wish to use.  
WAP accounts are created in Control panel >  
Connections > WAP accounts  
Messaging accounts SMS tab settings  
SMS Service  
centre address  
The SMS Service centre address is the phone  
number where your text messages are stored. It is  
normally imported from the SIM card but if that  
fails, your network operator can provide you with  
the service centre address.  
Select between:  
Home only - messages are downloaded  
automatically when you are connected to your  
home network.  
Character Set  
Your network operator may also specify the  
On - messages are also downloaded automatically  
when you are roaming outside your home network  
Off - automatic download is off, you will receive  
notifications of incoming messages and have to  
download them manually.  
Character Set  
.
Messages stored  
for  
You can set a time limit after which text messages  
are deleted from the network by choosing a value  
in the Messages stored for list.  
Connection type  
Specify if you prefer to use GPRS or GSM  
connection as directed by your network operator.  
Set whether or not to have a size limit for incoming  
messages:  
Download size  
and  
No restrictions - the size of the incoming messages  
does not matter, all messages will be received.  
Smaller than - messages smaller than the limit will  
be received, bigger messages will be deflected.  
Smaller than  
Tip If you send and receive text messages in several countries/  
regions, you can avoid having to change the service centre  
address when you travel abroad by entering the international  
dialling prefix (for example '+') and the appropriate country/  
region code for your network operator.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
162  
Control panel  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Advanced settings  
MMS Advanced settings tabs  
Select Advanced to make settings about how your P908 will send  
and receive multimedia messages.  
Receive  
These settings apply to multimedia messages that you  
receive.  
Select the Play full screen checkbox, when you want to  
play MMS messages in full screen.  
Select the check boxes to send a notification message to the  
sender when a message is:  
• Delivered to you: Allow delivery notification  
• Read by you: Allow read notification  
MMS Advanced settings tabs  
Send  
The values you give these settings will be default for all  
multimedia messages that you send. You can of course  
choose other values for an individual message in Messages.  
You can set the Validity period for your messages, that is,  
how long they should be available to the receiver.  
Maximum is the default.  
You can filter reception of incoming messages by message  
class (Advertisements Information, and Anonymous  
,
You can give your messages a Priority of Low  
,
Normal  
senders) as well messages from senders listed in Contacts.  
Selecting a check box will filter out messages of that  
category.  
To receive multimedia messages only from senders listed  
in your Contacts, select all other check boxes and clear the  
check box for Anonymous senders.  
(default) or High  
.
You can set a level of Content alert for the multimedia  
messages that you send to make sure that they will be  
played back correctly on different products.  
If checked, a warning message is displayed whenever you  
add a non-conformant item to a multimedia message. You  
have the option to send anyway.  
Area tab  
Select the check boxes to provide the function you want:  
Hide number prevents the sent message from showing your  
number.  
Read report requests a read notification from receivers of  
your messages.  
On the Area tab you make settings related to Cell Broadcast  
Services. These include both Area Information and Cell  
Information services. The availability of Cell and Area  
Information Services is operator-dependent.  
Delivery report requests a delivery notification from  
receivers of your messages.  
Reply with history includes the original with your reply.  
Your network may broadcast the area code as cell information.  
Your P908 can to display it below the network name in the Flip  
closed standby view.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Control panel  
163  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Area Information is a type of text message that is sent to all  
subscribers in a certain network area, for example a local traffic  
report.  
To delete a channel  
Select Delete. Since deleting a channel cannot be undone, you  
will be asked to confirm the delete. Deleting the channel will  
also delete any stored Area Information messages for that  
channel in your Area Info Inbox.  
To enable Cell Information  
Select the Cell information check box  
To turn Area Information on  
WAP accounts  
1. Check the Area information check box. Received messages  
will be automatically stored, and displayed in the list when  
dismissed.  
Use these settings to set up and manage WAP accounts on your  
P908.  
WAP accounts are intended for multimedia messages and for  
accessing the Internet through a WAP gateway. (Such gateways  
make use of proxy port 9200-9203.) All other proxy settings  
should be included in your Internet accounts.  
2. The list shows all the channels that you have defined on your  
P908. The check box for each channel shows if it is on  
(checked, ready to receive messages) or off (cleared, not  
active):  
For security reasons, some WAP pages and services, for  
example online banking, can only be accessed from a particular  
WAP account.  
To add a new channel  
1. Select New  
.
2. Enter the number of the new channel in the New Channel  
dialogue. Channel numbers can be from 0 to 999. If there are  
too many channels defined, New will be disabled.  
Channel numbering is operator-dependent. Please consult  
your network operator for information.  
The dialogue has two tabs: Basic and Preferred.  
Basic tab  
The dialogue shows a list of all the WAP accounts on your P908.  
You can add a New account to the list and Edit or Delete an  
existing account.  
To turn a channel on or off  
Select the channel in the list and check the check box. To turn it  
off, clear the check box.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
164  
Control panel  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Note You access WAP pages through an Internet Service  
Provider (ISP) so, when you create a WAP account, you must  
choose one of your existing Internet accounts or first create a  
new one.  
If you do not set a preferred WAP account, the preferred Internet  
account will be used when connecting to the Internet.  
THE OTHER TAB  
To create a new WAP account  
The other tab contains all settings that are not related to the  
device or connections. This is also where settings from system  
components and add-ons, developed by third-party developers,  
will be found.  
1. Enter the name of the WAP account.  
2. Select the Internet account you want to use. Preferred  
indicates the account set as preferred in the Internet setup.  
3. If you are going to use a WAP gateway or a proxy, select the  
Use Proxy check box.  
Certificate manager  
4. Enter the Address of the gateway or proxy.  
Digital certificates ensure that the Web or WAP pages you visit,  
or any software you install, really are created by the person you  
expect.  
5. Enter the Port of the gateway or proxy.  
For a WAP gateway use:  
9201 for a normal connection.  
Certificates may be present on the pages that you view or the  
software that you download. Your P908 compares these  
certificates with a set of certificates that are stored in Certificate  
manager to ensure the authenticity of the page or software. If the  
certificates do not match, your P908 informs you, and gives you  
the following choices:  
9203 for an encrypted secure connection.  
If the gateway/proxy requires Username and Password, which  
is very unusual, fill in the last two fields in the dialogue.  
Preferred tab  
Prevent the page being loaded or the software being installed.  
Continue at your own risk.  
Select the check box to set a preferred WAP account. It will be  
used when you use the Open page command in the  
Internet  
application and when a page is opened from another P908  
application.  
The certificates on your P908 have been created and issued by  
an independent organisation that ensures their authenticity.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Control panel  
165  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Security information  
Type of certificate  
Security information is displayed when Certificate manager  
cannot be sure of the origin of the page or software. For  
example, security information will be displayed if:  
The type can be either User or Certificate Authority.  
User certificates contain your identity. This type of certificate  
is used when the server asks for client authentication. The  
client application requests you to identify yourself by  
choosing a user certificate.  
The certificate on a page has expired.  
The identity of a software manufacturer cannot be verified.  
Certificate Authority certificates contain server details. This  
type of certificate is handled by your P908 when the server  
only requires server authentication. This means that your  
identity remains anonymous.  
Security information is also displayed when a certificate on your  
P908 has:  
Expired.  
Been revoked by the independent organisation that issued it.  
Flip removed  
Adding and deleting certificates  
This dialogue lets you enable the use of the Virtual flip when the  
flip of your P908 has been removed, see ‘Virtual flip’ on  
page 17.  
Your P908 handles certificates automatically so, most of the  
time, you can browse the Internet securely without using  
Certificate manager. If you do need to add or delete a certificate,  
you will usually be informed by your network operator or  
system administrator. You should delete a certificate from  
Certificate manager if you are informed, or suspect, that:  
Format disk  
This dialogue primarily lets you rename and format any  
Memory Stick Duo that you install in your P908. Your P908  
comes with one Memory Stick Duo.  
The certificate does not belong to the person who supplied it.  
The certificate was issued incorrectly by the independent  
organisation that created it.  
When you format a disk, you delete all the information on it,  
including any applications that you may have installed. You also  
delete all information placed on it by other devices (these  
folders are hidden except in File Manager).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
166  
Control panel  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
IP Security manager  
Master reset  
The IP security manager displays stored policies and only one  
policy can be activated at a time.This is used for secure  
connections over the Internet, typically to a corporate intranet. If  
needed, your company information services department will  
supply the necessary information.  
Use Master reset to reset your P908.  
Note All user data, as well as pre-installed media files and  
application data files (including, for example, backgrounds,  
ring signals and pictures), will be deleted and settings will be set  
to the state they were, after you selected the language. The  
selected local language will be restored.  
There are two types of passwords needed:  
IP security password: is to be set when activating the very  
first policy, that is, this password is only set once, but it is  
possible to change it later at any time by tapping the  
Password button.  
If you have backed up your user data, you can restore it from the  
backup, see ‘Restoring data’ on page 143.  
You can restore media files and application data files from the  
Multimedia for P908 CD, or from the Web.  
Activation password: is needed when a policy is activated  
for the first time and the supplier of the policy gives this.  
If you want to keep installed applications, clear the Delete user  
installed applications check box.  
Language selection  
Secure tokens  
Use this list of all languages stored on your P908 to change  
language. The highlighted entry is the language presently in use.  
If you need access to a network that requires secure access  
(often known as ‘strong authentication’), for example a  
corporate intranet, you can set up the Internet account you use to  
log in to that network to use secure access and generate the  
required one-time password when you make the connection.  
When you have selected a new language, you have to turn the  
P908 off and then on again for the change to take effect.  
Your P908 supports the following secure access systems:  
SecureID from RSA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Control panel  
167  
               
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
SafeWord from Secure Computing  
Deleting information from applications  
To delete information from an application: select an application  
in the list. This application is then displayed. Delete the old or  
unwanted entries or information.  
It is also possible to add other access systems through third-  
party software.  
If you have a separate device or application that requires one-  
time passwords according to one of these systems, you do not  
need a separate hardware token generator (Hard Token). Your  
P908 can generate passwords that are not associated with an  
Internet account.  
Here are some housekeeping tips for different applications:  
Delete any unwanted recordings as even short ones occupy a  
lot of space.  
In  
Messages, delete any old messages from your Inbox or  
You manage secure access in your P908 using Secure Tokens.  
Sent folders.  
In  
Calendar, delete all entries in a specified time period by  
Each token is associated with one vendor/system and may be  
associated with one or more Internet accounts (or none, when  
you use your P908 as a Hard Token). You can configure as many  
tokens as needed.  
selecting Calendar > Remove entries in your list of entries.  
In  
Tasks, delete all completed entries by selecting  
Tasks > Delete completed in your list of entries.  
Throughout your P908, use folders as you create and receive  
information to speed up housekeeping later.  
Tip Dialogue details when using secure access are vendor,  
system and network-specific. You should contact the  
administrator of the network you wish to access to get the  
correct information.  
Deleting or copying general files  
Tap Files to see lists of all stored general file types on your P908  
and the Memory Stick Duo. You can copy files to a specified  
folder, delete unwanted files, and launch the appropriate  
application to view or play a file in the list.  
Storage manager  
The list shows the applications on your P908 and the space they  
occupy. Tapping the Files button lets you manage general files  
stored internally on the P908 or on a Memory Stick Duo.  
To delete files or copy files between folders  
1. Select Files.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
168  
Control panel  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
2. Select the Type of file to move or delete.  
WIM PIN settings  
3. Select the Location folder.  
WIM (WAP Identity Module) is used for performing security  
4. Tap one or more check boxes to select the files to copy or  
delete.  
functions, especially to store and process information needed for  
user identification and authentication. It is a tamper-resistant  
store for private keys, certificates and other items that may  
require a PIN for access or modification.  
5. To copy files, tap Copy and select the destination folder.  
To delete files, tap Delete. You will be asked to confirm.  
The WIM management dialogue consists of a PIN choice list and a  
WIM items list.  
Uninstalling applications  
If you uninstall an application, you can always reinstall it if you  
want to use it later.  
You can select a PIN from the PIN choice list. The WIM items  
list changes content dynamically, displaying only the keys that  
are protected by the selected PIN and also have an associated  
certificate. Other keys that are protected by the selected PIN but  
do not have an associated certificate are not shown in the WIM  
item list. This is the case when WIM PIN (PIN-G) is selected.  
To uninstall applications  
1. Select Uninstall.  
A list of applications that can be uninstalled is shown.  
2. Select the application to uninstall.  
Note The PIN-G applies to the whole WIM and any items that  
do not have a different PIN. This means that no specific items on  
the WIM are linked to PIN-G.  
3. Select Uninstall.  
Note You cannot uninstall the standard applications that came  
with your P908.  
You can change status of a PIN:  
Enable PIN A PIN code that is enabled is requested for  
authorisation of an operation. To proceed with the operation  
you must enter the PIN code.  
Disable PIN A PIN code that is disabled is not requested to  
authorise an operation to proceed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Control panel  
169  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To change the PIN code  
1. Select the PIN you want to change from the choice list.  
2. Select Change PIN  
.
If a PIN code has been blocked, you must unblock it before it  
can be used again. Select the PIN and select Change PIN  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
170  
Control panel  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Getting started with Internet and Messages  
Connection type  
When your P908 connects to a service provider, it will use a  
GSM or GPRS network provided by a network operator. Many  
network operators offer both GPRS and GSM services.  
Introduction  
Before you can use  
Internet and  
Messages to access the  
Internet and send or receive messages, you will need to make  
some user-specific settings in the  
Control Panel.  
The connection type defines which network your account uses  
to connect to the Internet. GPRS Internet accounts use the GPRS  
network, and Dial-Up Internet accounts use the GSM network.  
Service provider  
You will need a service provider to connect your P908 to the  
network.The service provider could be:  
GPRS  
If your network operator supports GPRS, a GPRS Internet  
account allows you to:  
An Internet Service Provider (ISP) which connects you to the  
Internet.  
An access point provided by your network operator.  
Remain permanently connected to the Internet without being  
charged for connection time. With a GPRS account, you are  
charged for the amount of information you view, download  
or send when your are connected to the Internet.Check your  
operator for details of your subscription.  
A private service provider such as your company or your  
bank.  
You will need to enter specific service provider details into your  
P908 to set up an Internet account. It can hold the details of  
multiple service providers, for example, you may have separate  
Internet and corporate accounts.  
Avoid having to reconnect to the Internet if the connection is  
broken.  
Dial-Up  
Your network operator or retailer may have pre-installed  
services, check with them.  
For both Dial-Up and High-Speed Dial-Up accounts, you are  
charged for the length of time you are connected. If your  
network operator supports them, you can increase your  
connection speed (at a cost) by setting up a high-speed account.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started with Internet and Messages  
171  
           
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Accepting new Internet or Messaging  
settings  
Automatically set up service  
provider and messaging  
New configuration messages will appear in the Auto setup  
The easiest way to set up your P908 is automatically, through  
your service provider.  
account inbox of  
Messages. (Configuration messages for  
e-mail accounts will, however, be found in your SMS message  
inbox.)  
For  
of:  
Messages settings your P908 supports automatic setup  
When an auto setup message appears, select it.  
e-mail accounts  
A dialogue with a brief text and operator message appears on the  
screen. You can accept the new settings or leave the message in  
MMS message (Multimedia Messaging Service) settings.  
the inbox  
.
Contact your service provider's support desk and ask about  
automatic remote configuration of ISP (Internet Service  
Provider) settings, e-mail and MMS message settings.  
If the name of the new account is the same as that of an existing  
account you can choose to create a new account with the same  
name or replace the existing account.  
If remote configuration is possible, they will send you the auto-  
configuration messages required by SMS message.  
Note Never accept remote configuration messages if you are  
not expecting them or are unsure where they have come from.  
To check that your SMS messaging settings are correct  
1. Select  
Control panel > Connections > Messaging accounts >  
Manually set up service  
SMS.  
2. Check the information, for example the address of the service  
centre.  
provider  
As an alternative to setting up an Internet account automatically,  
you can enter the settings manually from  
Control panel >  
Connections > Internet accounts.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started with Internet and Messages  
172  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
First collect all the information you will need. You can obtain  
this information from your ISP (Internet Service Provider), or if  
you are connecting to a corporate network, your information  
services department.  
The dialogue has four tabs, one for each type of messaging  
service:  
e-mail  
The provider of your e-mail service, or for a corporate  
account, your information services manager can provide  
you with the necessary details.  
All settings are described in ‘Internet accounts’ on page 155.  
All settings are described in ‘Email tab’ on page 160.  
To set up a new account follow the steps under ‘To create a  
new e-mail account’ on page 160.  
To set up a new account follow the steps under ‘To create a new  
Internet account’ on page 156.  
SMS  
Short Message Service  
message  
The necessary settings are usually provided on your SIM  
card.  
All settings are described in ‘SMS tab’ on page 162.  
As an alternative to setting up Messages automatically, you can  
MMS  
message  
Multimedia Messaging Service  
Your MMS messaging provider will be able to provide you  
with the necessary information.  
Before you set up MMS messaging you need to set up an  
Internet account in Control panel > Connections > Internet  
accounts and a WAP account in Control panel >  
Connections > WAP accounts  
enter the settings for the messaging services you want to use  
yourself from  
Control panel > Connections > Messaging  
accounts  
.
First collect all the information you will need. You can obtain  
this information from the following sources:  
All settings are described in ‘MMS tab’ on page 162.  
If your network operator offers an e-mail service you can get  
the necessary details from them.  
Area  
Cell Broadcast Service: Area and Cell information  
Your network operator will be able to inform you if these  
services are available.  
Your Internet service provider.  
Your information services manager in the case of connecting  
to the corporate network to access your work e-mail account.  
All settings are described in ‘Area tab’ on page 163.  
Your network operator in the case of SMS message and Cell  
Broadcast Services.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started with Internet and Messages  
173  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
First collect all the information you will need. You can obtain  
Setting up WAP accounts  
this information from the WAP service provider, or if you are  
A WAP account (sometimes called a WAP profile) defines a  
connecting to a corporate network, your information services  
service provider and gateway that should be used when making  
manager.  
a connection to WAP services. You also need a WAP account  
when you use MMS message (Multimedia Messaging Service).  
All settings are described in ‘WAP accounts’ on page 164.  
To set up a new account follow the steps under ‘To create a new  
WAP account’ on page 165.  
The WAP gateway sits between your P908 and the WAP site  
coding and decoding information. You can set up details of more  
than one gateway if necessary, for example one for your MMS  
messaging, one to access corporate data over WAP, and another  
to access your bank's WAP service.  
Using your P908 as a modem  
Your P908 contains a complete GSM/GPRS modem, so you can  
use it to connect your PC to the Internet or corporate  
The easiest way to set up a WAP account on your P908 is  
automatically, through your service provider. Contact your  
service provider's support desk and ask about automatic setup.  
intranet.Your P908 appears to the laptop like a normal modem.  
You link the laptop to your P908 using Bluetooth wireless  
technology, infrared, or cable (USB or serial).The connection  
over the air can be by any of the bearers that your P908  
supports:  
Note You access WAP pages through an Internet Service  
Provider (ISP) so, when you create a WAP account, you must  
choose one of your existing Internet accounts or first create a  
new one.  
GPRS  
Manually set up a WAP account  
Alternatively to setting up a WAP account automatically, you  
HSCSD (High-speed Circuit Switched Data)  
CSD (Circuit Switched Data).  
can enter the settings manually from  
Control panel >  
A Windows® modem driver file and a PC utility, the Dial-Up  
Networking Wizard, is provided on your PC Suite for P908 CD. The  
wizard will help you configure DUN (Dial-Up Networking)  
entries on your PC for GPRS and HSCSD connections.  
Connections > WAP accounts  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started with Internet and Messages  
174  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Once paired with a Bluetooth-enabled laptop, your P908 is  
ready to make a connection to the Internet or corporate network.  
Because Bluetooth is wire-free and requires no line-of-sight  
alignment, you can place the laptop in a comfortable position  
and let your P908 remain in your pocket, briefcase, or even be  
placed up to 10 metres away.  
Make sure that you have any information concerning, for  
example, phone numbers, names of servers or domains, that the  
server that you want to connect to may require.  
To set up a GPRS or HSCSD (High-Speed Circuit Switched  
Data) connection using the Dial-Up Networking Wizard  
1. Start the Dial-Up Networking Wizard from the Sony Ericsson  
If you wish to use an infrared link, the range is typically up to 1  
metre. The two infrared ports must be kept in line of sight, at an  
angle of no more than approximately 30 degrees.  
folder of the Start menu on your PC.  
2. Choose Create a new Dial-Up connection.  
3. Follow the instructions in the wizard.  
The Dial-Up Networking Wizard  
To edit a previously created DUN entry  
The wizard simplifies creating GPRS DUN connections by  
setting the proper values in the PC DUN entry and linking the  
entry to one of the GPRS configurations in your P908. You can  
also view and modify the GPRS settings in the P908.  
1. Start the Dial-Up Networking Wizard from the Sony Ericsson  
folder of the Start menu on your PC.  
2. Modify a Dial-Up connection.  
3. Select the desired connection from the list.  
4. Follow the instructions in the wizard.  
For HSCSD DUN entries, it updates the modem settings such  
that the specified data rate and type of bearer (ISDN / Analogue)  
will be used when you make a DUN connection.  
To define P908 as a modem  
To set up a CSD (GSM Data) or HSCSD connection you will  
need to install your P908 as a modem manually.  
You can view or change the DUN entries created with the  
wizard using the standard Windows® DUN user interface.  
The Dial-Up Networking Wizard software included in the PC  
Suite for P908 must be installed in your PC and your P908 must  
be connected to the PC via cable, infrared or Bluetooth wireless  
technology. See ‘Connecting to other devices’ on page 135.  
To set up a Dial-Up entry for CSD or HSCSD  
1. On the PC, open the Control Panel.  
2. Choose to install a new modem.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started with Internet and Messages  
175  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
3. Choose your P908 as the modem.  
The HSCSD/CSD  
a data connection. Where GPRS is suspended, for example, the  
GPRS suspended state is indicated by a combined icon  
There are three states for the GPRS icon: Active  
active transferring data (alternates between and  
and suspended . Any data transfer either received or sent  
and GPRS  
icons are displayed during  
4. Select the port where the P908 is connected.  
.
5. Confirm the selection. A new DUN connection has been  
created.  
,
)
Connecting  
activates the GPRS active icon for 5 seconds.  
To connect using a DUN entry created by the wizard  
Connection information  
When you select the data connection icon, during an active data  
connection, a menu appears with the choices Information and  
1. If you are connecting by cable, set your P908 to Modem cable  
connection mode, see ‘Cable’ on page 154.  
2. Use any conventional method to make a connection:  
– Click the Desktop shortcut created by the wizard.  
– Select the entry from within the system DUN folder.  
Disconnect  
.
Select Information to view information on the connection.  
Select Disconnect to end the connection.  
– Run an application that has built-in support for using  
DUN entries (for example a browser or e-mail client).  
GPRS status information  
When the signal strength icon is selected, network, GPRS status  
information and, if applicable, GPRS error text appear.  
GPRS - connection information  
Icons on the status bar let you overview the information on data  
connection calls.  
GPRS data log  
A new GPRS data log entry is created when a GPRS account  
establishes a connection for the first time. It does not wait for  
transfer data. If there is an existing data log associated with the  
current GPRS connection, this is updated.  
A combined signal strength and GPRS signal icon provides  
information on the GPRS service status. The GPRS connection  
status appears above the signal strength icon. There are three  
states for the icon, unavailable  
, available  
and  
attached  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started with Internet and Messages  
176  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
The GPRS data log shows a list of GPRS Internet accounts.  
Where one account is active or suspended, the relevant status  
icon is displayed to the left of the account.  
Session data  
When the connection is deactivated, for example when the  
current Internet account is disconnected, the total data sent and  
received in the last session is displayed.  
To view information on an account  
The information is displayed for a couple of seconds. To dismiss  
the information when the Flip is closed, press  
1. Select an account in the list.  
.
2. Information on the account is shown. The data log is updated  
dynamically.  
Buttons allow you to delete or reset the current data. These  
buttons are disabled during an active or suspended  
connection.  
To delete the log for an account  
1. Select an account in the list.  
2. Select GPRS data log > Delete  
.
To reset the log of an account  
1. Select an account in the list.  
2. Select GPRS data log > Reset  
.
To delete or reset the log of several accounts  
1. Select the check boxes of the accounts in the list to be deleted  
or reset.  
2. Select GPRS data log > Reset or GPRS data log > Delete  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started with Internet and Messages  
177  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
REFERENCE  
Troubleshooting  
This chapter consists of a selection of suggestions for solving  
possible problems with your P908. If this does not help, please  
try the Solution Finder on www.SonyEricsson.com.cn. There  
you can also find other information that can be helpful.  
Device lock  
Phone locked is displayed followed by the prompt  
Enter lock code  
.
Your P908 is locked to prevent unauthorised use.  
To unlock the P908:  
• Enter your device lock code, 0000 by default,  
then press  
or  
.
Start-up problems  
P908 will not  
start  
• Handheld phone: recharge or replace the battery.  
Key symbol  
The keypad is locked to prevent unintentional key  
action.  
• Make sure the contacts on the battery and  
charger are clean and avoid charging the battery  
in extreme temperatures.  
Press  
keys.  
followed by  
to unlock the  
Vehicle Handsfree: check that the P908 is  
properly inserted into the holder and check the  
fuse in the fuse holder (connected to the battery  
cable).  
Indicator light  
Flashes red  
This indicates that the battery is running low and  
soon needs recharging or replacing with a spare.  
• With Vehicle Handsfree (VHF) equipment, make  
sure that the following are inserted or connected:  
your P908 and its holder, the fuse in the fuse  
holder, and/or the external antenna.  
Lock problems  
Insert card  
• Make sure a SIM card is activated and inserted  
into your P908. See ‘SIM card’ on page 11.  
Blocked SIM  
card  
If your PIN is entered incorrectly three times in a  
row, the SIM card will be blocked. You can  
unblock it by using your PUK. See ‘SIM card lock’  
on page 40.  
Does not flash  
If the indicator light at the top of your P908 does  
not flash and no network is displayed there is no  
network within range. See ‘Telephone does not  
work’ on page 179.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
178  
Troubleshooting  
           
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
The persons I  
talk with has  
problems  
hearing what I  
say  
• Make sure you do not cover the microphone  
when you talk. You find the microphone at the  
bottom, next to the connector.  
Communication problems  
Telephone does • The received signal can be too weak, possibly  
not work  
because you are being shielded from the signal.  
Check your display signal strength indicator.  
Move outdoors or up from the ground to obtain a  
sufficiently strong signal.  
You could be almost out of network range. The  
sound improves with a better network  
connection.  
• Make sure the P908 is not set into Flight mode.  
Cannot use  
WAP  
Your subscription does not include WAP. Check  
with your service provider.  
Your P908 might be busy sending or receiving  
data or e-mail.  
• The settings are not correct. Enter new settings.  
Contact you service provider.  
• Check the settings for diverting or restricting  
calls. See ‘Divert calls’ on page 57, ‘Accepted  
callers’ on page 57 and ‘Restrict calls’ on  
page 58.  
Cannot send  
nor receive  
Your subscription does not include SMS or  
MMS. Check with your service provider.  
SMS or MMS  
• If Emergency calls only is displayed on the  
screen, you are not allowed to use the network  
within range. You can, however, usually make an  
emergency call using the emergency number.  
• Check with you service provider that you have  
entered the correct Service Centre phone  
number.  
• Check the settings in the Control panel. Contact  
you service provider or visit.  
• If No network is displayed on the screen, you are  
in an area that is not covered by a network or the  
received signal is too weak.  
• Make sure that Flight mode is deactivated.  
• Phone memory might be full. Delete some  
pictures or music, for example.  
Cannot hear  
incoming call  
• Increase the ring signal volume.  
• Increase the ring signal volume.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
179  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Fax calls  
Your P908 does not support fax transmission. Even  
if your operator subscription supports fax  
transmission, fax calls will be rejected. However,  
they can be diverted to another number such as the  
office fax number, see ‘Divert calls’ on page 57 for  
more information.  
Cannottransfer • Make sure that Bluetooth wireless technology is  
items with  
Bluetooth  
wireless  
activated.  
• Make sure that the devices are in range with each  
other. Maximum range is 10 metres.  
technology  
• Make sure potential fax callers do not try to send  
a fax to your P908 as they can experience a  
number of retries before the fax transmission is  
stopped.  
Cannot  
establish  
connection with  
a Bluetooth  
wireless  
• Make sure that the devices are correctly paired.  
See ‘Connection via Bluetooth wireless  
technology’ on page 136.  
• Make sure that the handset or handsfree is  
charged.  
Problems to connect to a PC or another device  
technology  
handset or  
handsfree  
Not possible to • Make sure that the Sync Station and cable is  
• Make sure that the devices are in range with each  
other.  
establish  
correctly connected to the PC.  
connection  
using cable  
• Make sure that the correct COM port on the PC  
is enabled. Right-click the P908 link symbol in  
the PC taskbar, and select Properties. Select the  
USB COM port.  
Memory full  
When your P908 has no more space available to  
save or store information, a message is shown.  
You must then free up memory to ensure the  
proper functioning of the P908.  
• Make sure regular backups are made with  
Communications Suite to reduce the risk of lost  
or corrupted information.  
• Uninstall PC suite for P908. Connect the Sync  
Station with the P908 to the PC. Reinstall PC  
suite for P908, following the installation  
procedure thoroughly.  
• Check for PC suite for P908 updates on  
www.SonyEricsson.com.cn. If you find a new  
version of the program, download it and install  
this instead of the old one.  
Storage  
manager  
• Use the storage manager to move items from the  
P908 internal memory to a Memory Stick Duo,  
or remove items from the P908 memory.  
Cannottransfer Place the P908 in the Sync Station. In the PC, open  
pictures  
My P908 and browse through the P908 file system  
to find the picture.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
180  
Troubleshooting  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To start the storage manager  
Applications  
stop responding  
• Close the Flip and open it again.  
• Select  
Applications >  
Control  
• Turn off the P908 and turn it on again.  
panel > Device > Storage manager.  
• Remove the battery, wait about 10 seconds, and  
insert it again.  
• A list of all applications and their memory  
requirements is shown.  
• Phone memory might be full. Delete some  
pictures or music, for example.  
• See ‘Deleting or copying general files’ on  
page 168 and ‘Deleting information from  
applications’ on page 168.  
• If the problem continues, do a master reset. See  
‘Master reset’ on page 167. All data will be lost.  
Information in Use the applications to remove unused or old items  
System failure  
In the case of a system failure, your P908 will flash  
an animated warning. To recover, please restart the  
P908 like this:  
applications  
from the P908 internal memory:  
WAP history or bookmarks.  
• Messages.  
• Press and hold the On/Off button for at least 10  
seconds to turn the P908 off.  
• Contacts.  
• Call logs.  
• Calendar tasks or appointments.  
• Jotter notes.  
• Restart as normal: Press the On/Off button to  
turn on your P908.  
Miscellaneous  
Cannot save on You might have a Memory Stick Duo with a lock  
Memory Stick  
Duo  
switch. Move the switch in the other direction.  
• The Memory Stick Duo might be full. Delete  
some files on it.  
Cannot change • The first time you start the P908 you select a  
language except  
to the language  
I chose when I  
first started  
language. All other languages are then deleted, in  
order to free memory. You can find all languages  
on the PC suite for P908 CD. From the CD, you  
can install the language you want.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
181  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Guidelines for safe and efficient use  
Please read this information before using your mobile phone.  
Radio Frequency (RF) Exposure and SAR  
Your mobile phone is a low-power radio transmitter and receiver. When it is turned  
on, it emits low levels of radio frequency energy (also known as radio waves or  
radio frequency fields).  
Note Important: to avoid hearing impairment, answer call or lower volume before  
placing this product to your ear.  
Recommendations  
Governments around the world have adopted comprehensive international safety  
guidelines, developed by scientific organisations, e.g. ICNIRP (International Com-  
mission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection), through periodic and thorough  
evaluation of scientific studies. These guidelines establish permitted levels of radio  
wave exposure for the general population. All Sony Ericsson mobile phone models  
are designed to operate within these stringent levels. The levels include a safety  
margin designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health,  
and to account for any variations in measurements.  
• Always treat your product with care and keep it in a clean and dust-free place.  
• Do not expose your product to liquid or moisture or humidity.  
• Do not expose your product to extreme high or low temperatures.  
• Do not expose your product to open flames or lit tobacco products.  
• Do not drop, throw or try to bend your product.  
• Do not paint your product.  
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) is the unit of measurement for the amount of radio  
frequency energy absorbed by the body when using a mobile phone. The SAR  
value is determined at the highest certified power level in laboratory conditions,  
but the actual SAR level of the mobile phone while operating can be well below  
this value.  
This is because the mobile phone is designed to use the minimum power required  
to reach the network. Therefore, the closer you are to a base station, the more  
likely it is that the actual SAR level will decrease.  
Variations in SAR below the radio frequency exposure guidelines do not mean that  
there are variations in safety. While there may be differences in SAR levels among  
various mobile phones, all Sony Ericsson mobile phone models are designed to  
meet radio frequency exposure guidelines.  
A separate leaflet with SAR information for this mobile phone model is included  
with the material that comes with this mobile phone. This information can also be  
found, together with more information on radio frequency exposure and SAR, on  
www.SonyEricsson.com.cn  
• Do not use your product near medical equipment without requesting permission.  
• Do not use your product when in, or around aircraft, or areas posted ‘turn off  
two-way radio’.  
• Do not use your product in an area where a potentially explosive atmosphere  
exists.  
• Do not place your product or install wireless equipment in the area above your  
car’s airbag.  
• Do not attempt to disassemble your product. Only Sony Ericsson authorised  
personnel should perform any service.  
Antenna  
Only use an antenna that has been specifically designed by Sony Ericsson for your  
mobile phone. Use of unauthorised or modified antennas could damage your  
mobile phone and may violate regulations, causing loss of performance and SAR  
levels above the recommended limits (see below).  
Driving  
Efficient use  
Please check if local laws and regulations restrict the use of mobile phones while  
driving or require drivers to use handsfree solutions. We recommend that you use  
only Ericsson or Sony Ericsson handsfree solutions intended for use with your  
Hold your mobile phone as you would any other phone. Do not cover the top of the  
phone when in use, as this affects call quality and may cause the phone to operate  
at a higher power level than needed, thus shortening talk and standby times.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
182  
Guidelines for safe and efficient use  
           
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
product. Please note that because of possible interference to electronic equipment,  
some vehicle manufacturers forbid the use of mobile phones in their vehicles  
unless a handsfree kit with an external antenna supports the installation.  
Always give full attention to driving and pull off the road and park before making  
or answering a call if driving conditions so require.  
Emergency Calls  
Mobile phones operate using radio signals, which cannot guarantee connection  
under all conditions. Therefore you should never rely solely upon any mobile  
phone for essential communications (e.g. medical emergencies).  
Emergency calls may not be possible on all cellular networks or when certain net-  
work services and/or mobile phone features are in use. Check with your local ser-  
vice provider.  
Personal Medical Devices  
Mobile phones may affect the operation of cardiac pacemakers and other  
implanted equipment. Please avoid placing the mobile phone over the pacemaker,  
e.g. in your breast pocket. When using the mobile phone, place it at the ear oppo-  
site the pacemaker. If a minimum distance of 15 cm (6 inches) is kept between the  
mobile phone and the pacemaker, the risk of interference is limited. If you have  
any reason to suspect that interference is taking place, immediately turn off your  
mobile phone. Contact your cardiologist for more information.  
Battery Use and Care  
We recommend that you fully charge the battery before you use your mobile phone  
for the first time. The battery can only be charged in temperatures between +5°C  
(+41°F) and +45°C (+113°F).  
A new battery or one that has not been used for a long time could have reduced  
capacity the first few times it is used.  
The talk and standby times depend on the actual transmission conditions when  
using the mobile phone. If the mobile phone is used near a base station, less power  
is required and talk and standby times are prolonged.  
For other medical devices, please consult the manufacturer of the device.  
Children  
DO NOT ALLOW CHILDREN TO PLAY WITH YOUR MOBILE PHONE OR  
ITS ACCESSORIES. THEY COULD HURT THEMSELVES OR OTHERS, OR  
COULD ACCIDENTALLY DAMAGE THE MOBILE PHONE OR ACCES-  
SORY. YOUR MOBILE PHONE OR ITS ACCESSORY MAY CONTAIN  
SMALL PARTS THAT COULD BE DETACHED AND CREATE A CHOKING  
HAZARD.  
Warning! May explode if disposed of in fire.  
• Use only Ericsson or Sony Ericsson branded original batteries and  
chargers intended for use with your mobile phone. Other chargers  
may not charge sufficiently or may produce excessive heat. Using  
other batteries and chargers could be dangerous.  
• Do not expose the battery to liquid.  
Disposing of the Product  
• Do not let the metal contacts on the battery touch another metal  
object. This could short-circuit and damage the battery.  
Your mobile phone should not be placed in municipal waste. Please check local  
regulations for disposal of electronic products.  
• Do not disassemble or modify the battery.  
Power Supply  
• Do not expose the battery to extreme temperatures, and never  
above +60°C (+140°F). For maximum battery capacity, use the  
battery in room temperature.  
Connect the AC power adapter only to designated power sources as marked on the  
product. Make sure the cord is positioned so that it will not be subjected to damage  
or stress. To reduce the risk of electric shock, unplug the unit from any power  
source before attempting to clean it. The AC power adapter must not be used out-  
doors or in damp areas. Never alter the cord or plug. If the plug will not fit into the  
outlet, have a proper outlet installed by a qualified electrician.  
• Turn off your mobile phone before removing the battery.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Guidelines for safe and efficient use  
183  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
• Keep out of childrens’ reach.  
Conditions  
1. The warranty is valid only in the country (or region) where the Product was  
originally distributed/sold by Sony Ericsson and if the original proof of  
purchase issued to the original purchaser by a dealer authorised by Sony  
• Use the battery for the intended purpose only.  
• Do not allow the battery to be put into the mouth. Battery  
electrolytes may be toxic if swallowed.  
Ericsson for this Product, specifying the date of purchase and serial number*, is  
presented with the Product to be repaired or replaced. Sony Ericsson reserves  
the right to refuse warranty service if this information has been removed or  
changed after the original purchase of the Product from the dealer.  
Disposing of the battery  
Please check local regulations for disposal of batteries or call your  
local Sony Ericsson Customer Care Centre for information.  
The battery should never be placed in municipal waste. Use a bat-  
2. If Sony Ericsson repairs or replaces the Product, the repaired or replaced  
tery disposal facility if available.  
Product shall be warranted for the remaining time of the original warranty  
period or for thirty (30) days from the date of repair, whichever is longer. Repair  
or replacement may involve the use of functionally equivalent reconditioned  
units. Replaced parts or components will become the property of Sony  
Limited warranty  
Ericsson.  
Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications AB, S-221 88 Lund, Sweden, (Sony Eric-  
sson), provides this Limited Warranty for your mobile phone and original acces-  
sory delivered with your mobile phone (hereinafter referred to as "Product").  
Should your Product need warranty service, please return it to the dealer from  
whom it was purchased, or contact your local Sony Ericsson Customer Care Centre  
(national rates may apply) or visit www.SonyEricsson.com.cn to obtain further  
information.  
3. This warranty does not cover any failure of the Product due to normal wear and  
tear, or due to misuse, including but not limited to use in other than the normal  
and customary manner, in accordance with the Sony Ericsson instructions for  
use and maintenance of the Product. Nor does this warranty cover any failure of  
the Product due to accident, software or hardware modification or adjustment,  
acts of God or damage resulting from liquid.  
4. Since the cellular system on which the Product is to operate is provided by a  
carrier independent from Sony Ericsson, Sony Ericsson will not be responsible  
for the operation, availability, coverage, services or range of that system.  
What we will do  
5. This warranty does not cover Product failures caused by installations,  
modifications, or repair or opening of the Product performed by a non-Sony  
Ericsson authorised person.  
If, during the warranty period, this Product fails to operate under normal use and  
service, due to defects in design, materials or workmanship, Sony Ericsson author-  
ised distributors or service partners, in the country/region where you purchased the  
Product, will, at their option, either repair or replace the Product in accordance  
with the terms and conditions stipulated herein.  
6. The warranty does not cover Product failures which have been caused by use of  
accessories or other peripheral devices which are not Ericsson or Sony Ericsson  
branded original accessories intended for use with the Product.  
Sony Ericsson and its service partners reserve the right to charge a handling fee if a  
returned Product is found not to be under warranty according to the conditions  
below.  
Please note that your personal settings/downloads might be lost when the Product  
is repaired or replaced.  
7. Tampering with any of the seals on the Product will void the warranty.  
8. THERE ARE NO EXPRESS WARRANTIES, WHETHER WRITTEN OR  
ORAL, OTHER THAN THIS PRINTED LIMITED WARRANTY. ALL  
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE  
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS  
LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL SONY ERICSSON OR ITS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
184  
Guidelines for safe and efficient use  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
LICENSORS BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL  
DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING BUT NOT  
LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS, TO THE FULL  
EXTENT THOSE DAMAGES CAN BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW.  
Declaration of Conformity  
We, Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications AB of  
Nya Vattentornet  
S-221 88 Lund, Sweden  
Some countries or regions/provinces do not allow the exclusion or limitation of  
incidental or consequential damages, or limitation of the duration of implied war-  
declare under our sole responsibility that our product  
ranties, so the preceding limitations or exclusions may not apply to you.  
Sony Ericsson type FAB-1021011-BV and FAB-1021011-CN  
and in combination with our accessories, to which this declaration relates is in con-  
The warranty provided does not affect the consumer's statutory rights under appli-  
cable legislation in force, nor the consumer's rights against the dealer arising from  
formity with the appropriate standards 3GPP TS 51.010-1, EN 301489-7,  
their sales/purchase contract.  
EN 300328, EN 301489-17 and EN 60950, following the provisions of, Radio  
Equipment and Telecommunication Terminal Equipment directive 99/5/EC with  
requirements covering EMC directive 89/336/EEC, and Low Voltage directive 73/  
* In some countries/regions additional information is requested. If so, this is  
clearly shown on the valid proof of purchase.  
23/EEC.  
Kista, October 2003  
Place & date of issue  
FCC Statement  
0682  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is sub-  
ject to the following two conditions:  
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and  
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that  
may cause undesired operation.  
Hiroshi Yoshioka, Head of Product Business Unit GSM/UMTS  
We fulfil the requirements of the R&TTE Directive (99/5/EC).  
Environmental information  
•Halogenated flame retardants are not used in cabinets or the  
printed wiring board of the phone.  
• Power consumption of charger during standby < 0.3W.  
For more environmental information, look at the Environmental Declaration for  
P908 at www.SonyEricsson.com.cn  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Guidelines for safe and efficient use  
185  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Terms and definitions  
AU  
bps  
Format for audio data files.AU files have the suffix .au  
Bits per second – rate of data flow.  
Bearer  
cHTML  
Path over which data flows. Specifically in CSD and HSCSD,  
the type of phone link from the GSM network to the server –  
PSTN or ISDN.  
A version of HTML optimised for small devices.  
CLI  
Calling Line Identity. Shows the number of the person calling  
you in your mobile phone display. Your P908 will also display  
the name and photograph of the caller if they are in Contacts.  
You can then make an informed choice as to whether or not to  
take the call. Bear in mind that not all numbers can be displayed.  
To use this service, it must be supported by your network.  
Bluetooth  
Bluetooth wireless technology is a secure, fast radio connection  
technology. It is a computing and telecommunications industry  
specification that describes how mobile phones, computers, and  
personal digital assistants (PDAs) can easily interconnect with  
each other and with home and business phones and computers  
using a short-range wireless connection.  
COM Port  
Defines a serial/RS-232 port within the Windows environment.  
BMP  
CS  
Microsoft Windows Bitmap. A graphics format defined by  
Microsoft supporting 1, 4, 8 or 24 bit colour depth. No  
compression, so files can be large.  
Circuit Switched. Connection from A to B which has a fixed  
bandwidth and is maintained over a period of time, for example  
a voice phone call.  
Bookmark  
CSD  
A URL and header/title stored in the phone, enabling the user to  
go directly to a Web or WAP page.  
Circuit Switched Data. CSD is a GSM service providing a CS  
data connection at a rate of 9.6 or 14.4kbps.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
186  
Terms and definitions  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
CSS  
GIF  
Cascading Style Sheet. A feature of browsers.  
Graphics Interchange Format. Format for storing images which  
also supports animated images. Highly compressed by limiting  
the colour palette to 16 or 256 colours. It is one of the two most  
common file formats for graphic images on the World Wide  
Web. The other is JPEG.  
DTMF  
Dual Tone Multi Frequency. A method of coding digits as a  
combination of two audible tones.  
DUN  
GPRS  
Dial-Up Networking. The dial-up networking capability in  
Windows.  
General Packet Radio Services. A radio technology for GSM  
networks that adds packet-switching protocols, shorter setup  
time for ISP connections, and offers the possibility of charging  
by the amount of data sent rather than by connection time.  
GPRS promises to support flexible data transmission rates  
typically up to 20 or 30 kbps (with a theoretical maximum of  
171.2 kbps), as well as continuous connection to the network.  
e-GSM  
Extended GSM. New frequencies specified by the European  
Radio Communications Committee (ERC) for GSM use when  
additional spectrum is needed (network-dependent). It allows  
operators to transmit and receive just outside GSM's core  
900MHz frequency band. This extension gives increased  
network capability.  
GSM  
Global System for Mobile Communications. GSM is the world's  
most widely-used digital mobile phone system, now operating  
in over 160 countries/regions around the world.  
EMS  
Enhanced Messaging Service. An extension of SMS enabling  
pictures, animations, sound and text formatting to be added to  
text messages.  
GSM 900  
The GSM system family includes GSM 900, GSM 1800 and  
GSM 1900. GSM 900 refers to GSM working on a frequency of  
900 MHz.  
FCC  
Federal Communications Commission. US government agency  
which regulates radio communications.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Terms and definitions  
187  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
GSM 1800  
IMAP4  
Also known as DCS 1800 or PCN, this is a GSM digital network  
working on a frequency of 1800 MHz. It is used in Europe and  
Asia-Pacific.  
Internet Message Access Protocol (the latest version is IMAP4)  
is a standard client/server protocol for accessing e-mail from  
your local server. The e-mail is received and held for you by  
your IMAP server. You (or your client e-mail receiver) can view  
just the heading and the sender of the letter and then decide  
whether to download the mail.  
GSM 1900  
Also known as PCS. Refers to a GSM system running in the  
1900 MHz band. Used in the USA and Canada, for instance.  
IrDA  
HSCSD  
The Infrared Data Association is dedicated to developing  
standards for wireless, infrared transmission systems between  
devices. With IrDA ports, a device such as your P908 can  
exchange data with other devices without a cable connection.  
IrDA requires line-of-sight transmission.  
High-Speed Circuit-Switched Data (HSCSD) is circuit-switched  
wireless data transmission for mobile users at data rates of up to  
64 kbps.  
HTML  
Hypertext Markup Language is the set of markup symbols or  
codes inserted in a file intended for display on a World Wide  
Web browser page. The markup tells the Web browser how to  
display a Web page's words and images.  
ISDN  
Integrated Services Digital Network. Communication protocol  
offered by phone companies that permits phone networks to  
carry data, voice, and other source traffic. Selecting ISDN for  
CSD/HSCSD connections provides quicker call setup.  
HTTP  
HyperText Transfer Protocol. The communications protocol  
used to connect to servers on the World Wide Web. Its primary  
function is to establish a connection with a Web server and  
transmit HTML pages to the client browser.  
ISP  
Internet Service Provider. An organisation that provides access  
to the Internet.  
JFIF  
JPEG File Interchange Format.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
188  
Terms and definitions  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
JPEG  
MMS  
Joint Photographic Experts Group, best known for the .JPG  
format for still image compression.  
Multimedia Messaging Service. Logical extension of SMS and  
EMS. MMS defines a service enabling sound, images and video  
to be combined into multimedia messages. It supports photo  
quality pictures, and sounds in WAV, MIDI, AMR, or Melodies  
format.  
MBM  
Multiple Bit Map. Symbian OS bitmap format.  
MeT  
MP3  
Mobile Electronic Transactions. An initiative founded by  
Ericsson, Nokia and Motorola to establish a secure and  
consistent framework for mobile transactions.  
MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3 is a standard technology and format for  
compression a sound sequence into a very small file (about one-  
twelfth the size of the original file) while almost preserving the  
original level of sound quality when it is played.  
MIDI  
MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is a protocol  
designed for recording and playing back music on digital  
synthesizers that is supported by many makes of personal  
computer sound cards.  
MPEG-4  
The Moving Picture Experts Group, develops standards for  
digital video and digital audio compression. It operates under  
the auspices of the International Organization for  
Standardization (ISO). MPEG-4 goes far beyond compression  
methods. Instead of treating the data as continuous streams,  
MPEG-4 deals with audio/video items that can be manipulated  
independently, allowing for interaction with the coded data and  
providing flexibility in editing. MPEG-4 supports a wide range  
of audio and video modes and transmission speeds.  
MIME  
Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions. A protocol defining  
how messages are sent on the Internet. For example, MIME is  
used to describe how attachments are encoded and what type of  
data they contain.  
OS  
Operating System, such as Symbian OS, Linux, Microsoft  
Windows.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Terms and definitions  
189  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
OTA  
PIN  
Over The Air. A technology for transmission and reception of  
application related configuration information in a wireless  
communications system.  
A PIN is a personal identification number.  
PNG  
Portable Network Graphics. Format for storing images on file  
with data compression but without lowering of quality (loss of  
information).  
PC  
Personal Computer.  
PCS  
POP3  
Personal Communications Services, often used to describe GSM  
1900 networks.  
Post Office Protocol 3 is a standard client/server protocol for  
receiving e-mail. The e-mail is received and held for you by  
your POP server. Periodically, the P908 Messages application  
can check your mail-box on the server and download any mail.  
PDA  
Personal Digital Assistant. A handheld computer having  
functions such as address book, calendar, and so on.  
Protocol  
In information technology, a protocol is the special set of rules  
that end points in a telecommunication connection use when  
they communicate. Protocols exist at several levels in a  
telecommunication connection.  
PDF  
Portable Document Format. A format created by Adobe for  
storing and distributing documents.  
Phone book  
QQVGA  
A memory in the SIM card where phone numbers can be stored  
and accessed by name or position.  
Quarter Quarter VGA, 160 x 120 pixels.  
QVGA  
PIM  
Quarter VGA size, typically refers to a portrait oriented screen  
240 pixels wide x 320 pixels high.  
Personal Information Management. Generic term for  
applications such as Contacts, Calendar, Tasks, and so on.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
190  
Terms and definitions  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
RS232  
SMTP  
A standard for serial transmission between computers and  
peripheral devices  
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. Protocol used to send e-mail  
from an e-mail client via an SMTP server.  
SC  
SWIM  
Service Centre (for SMS).  
A SWIM card is a SIM card containing a WIM.  
Service Provider  
SyncML  
A company that provides services and subscriptions to mobile  
phone users.  
SyncML is a universal protocol for data synchronization,  
developed by the SyncML Initiative Ltd.  
SGML  
TCP/IP  
A generic markup language for representing documents.  
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. TCP/IP is the  
basic communication language or protocol of the Internet. It can  
also be used as a communications protocol in a private network  
(either an intranet or an extranet).  
SIM  
A SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) card is a ‘smart card’,  
inserted into GSM phones, that contains your phone account  
information. SIM cards can also be programmed to display  
custom menus for personalized services, for instance to assist  
operators in providing mobile commerce applications.  
TLS  
Transport Layer Security. Used by Web browsers, for example.  
URL  
SMIL  
Uniform Resource Locator. Points to a service or information on  
the Internet, for example: http://www.SonyEricsson.com.cn  
Synchronized Multimedia Integration Language. Used by MMS  
to describe how media items are to be played.  
SMS  
Short Message Service. Allows messages of up to 160  
characters to be sent and received via the network operator's  
message centre to a mobile phone.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Terms and definitions  
191  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
USB  
VPN  
Universal Serial Bus. A plug-and-play interface between a  
computer and add-on devices (such as audio players, joysticks,  
keyboards, phones, scanners, and printers). With USB, a new  
device can be added to your computer without having to add an  
adapter card or even having to turn the computer off.  
Virtual Private Network. A private network that is configured  
within a public network. A VPN appear as private national or  
international network to the customer, but physically shares a  
backbone trunk with other customers. VPNs enjoy the security  
of a private network via access control and encryption, while  
taking advantage of the economies of scale and built-in  
management facilities of large public networks. Today, there is  
tremendous interest in VPNs over the Internet, especially due to  
the constant threat of hacker attacks.  
USSD  
Unstructured Supplementary Services Data. Narrow-band GSM  
data service. For example entering *79*1234# might return the  
stock price for stock 1234.  
WAP  
vCal; vCalendar  
Wireless Application Protocol is a specification for a set of  
communication protocols to standardise the way that wireless  
devices, such as cellular phones and radio transceivers, can be  
used for Internet access, including e-mail, the World Wide Web  
and newsgroups.  
vCalendar defines a transport and platform-independent format  
for exchanging calendar and scheduling information for use in  
PIMs/PDAs and group schedulers. vCalendar is specified by  
IETF.  
vCard  
WAV  
vCard automates the exchange of personal information typically  
found on a traditional business card, for use in applications such  
as Internet mail, voice mail, Web browsers, phone applications,  
call centres, video conferencing, PIMs /PDAs, pagers, fax,  
office equipment, and smart cards. vCard is specified by IETF.  
A Wave file is an audio file format, created by Microsoft, that  
has become a standard PC audio file format for everything from  
system and game sounds to CD-quality audio. A Wave file is  
identified by a file name extension of WAV (.wav).  
WBXML  
VGA  
Wireless Binary Extensible Markup Language.  
Video Graphics Array. Graphics standard introduced by IBM,  
having a resolution of 640 x 480 pixels.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
192  
Terms and definitions  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
WIM  
XML  
The Wireless Identity Module is a data module for electronic  
identity certificates. It can contain both trusted and client  
certificates, private keys and algorithms needed for WTLS  
handshaking, encryption, decryption, and signature generation.  
The WIM module can be placed on a SIM card, called a SWIM  
card.  
Extensible Markup Language. An initiative from the W3C  
defining an ‘extremely simple’ dialect of SGML suitable for use  
on the WWW.  
WML  
Wireless Markup Language. A markup language used for  
authoring services, fulfilling the same purpose as HyperText  
Markup Language (HTML) does on the World Wide Web  
(WWW). In contrast to HTML, WML is designed to fit small  
handheld devices.  
WTLS  
Wireless Transport Layer Security. Part of WAP, WTLS  
provides privacy, data integrity and authentication on transport  
layer level between two applications.  
W3C  
The main standards body for the WWW.  
xHTML  
Extensible Hypertext Markup Language. A reformulation of  
HTML 4.01 in XML. Being XML, means that XHTML can be  
viewed, edited, and validated with standard XML tools. At the  
same time, it operates as well as or better than HTML 4 in  
existing HTML 4 conforming user agents.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Terms and definitions  
193  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Technical data  
General  
Screen  
Product  
Size  
P908 standard version, Latin character set  
115 x 57 x 24 mm  
Screen type  
Screen size  
TFT  
Flip closed: 208 x 208 pixels, 40 x 40 mm  
Flip open: 208 x 320 pixels, 40 x 61 mm  
Weight  
150 grams with battery and Flip.  
Pixel size  
0.192 x 0.192 mm, or 132 ppi (Pixels Per Inch)  
System and power class E-GSM 900 Class 4  
GSM 1800 Class 1  
Colour resolution 16-bit (65k colours)  
GSM 1900 Class 1  
Screen surface  
Illumination  
Touch-sensitive  
Antenna  
Built in  
Variable intensity back-light  
Speech Coding  
HR, FR, EFR supported where available,  
for high speech quality.  
Third Party Application Support  
SIM Card  
Small plug-in card, 3V or 5V type  
SDKs  
C++, PersonalJava PJAE 1.1.1a, J2ME MIDP 2.0  
/ CLDC HI 1.0 with JSR 120 and JSR 82 (partly),  
AppForge Microsoft Visual Basic v6  
Operating System  
Symbian OS v7.0 with UIQ v2.1 user  
interface and applications environment  
Processor  
ARM 9  
Load formats  
Security  
C++ or Java applications in Symbian SIS format.  
MIDP installation (JAR/JAD) from Browser or  
connected PC.  
Internal User storage  
For settings, user data (for example images,  
contacts, messages) and third-party  
applications: up to 13 Mbyte  
Support for signed applications.  
(Depending on applications in use)  
Additional storage  
Memory Stick Duo, up to 128 Mbyte  
supported. 32 Mbyte Memory stick Duo  
supplied, plus adapter.  
Bluetooth wireless technology  
Bluetooth compatibility  
statement  
This product is manufactured to comply  
with the Bluetooth specification 1.1.  
Operating temperature  
–15° to +55° C  
Battery life, standard  
battery  
Stand-by time: 16 - 250 hours  
(Depending on usage method.)  
Coverage area  
Up to 10 metres (33 feet)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
194  
Technical data  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Infrared transceiver  
Integrated CommuniCorder  
Data transmission rate  
Max speed between phone and IrDA  
device (that is a PC or another phone)  
SIR: up to 115,200 bps  
Picture Size  
640 x 480 pixels (VGA)  
320 x 240 pixels (QVGA)  
160 x 120 pixels (QQVGA)  
176 x 144 pixels (QCIF)  
Colour depth  
24 bit (16 million colours)  
GPRS Maximum Data Rates (kbps)  
Storage format  
Still pictures: JPEG/JFIF, 3 quality (compression)  
levels, user-selectable.  
CS-1  
CS-2  
CS-3  
CS-4  
9.05 kbps 13.4 kbps 15.6 kbps 21.4 kbps  
Video: MPEG4 video with AMR sound.  
4 + 1 Rx 36.2  
Tx 9.05  
53.6  
13.4  
62.4  
15.6  
85.6  
21.4  
Pictures (Image viewer)  
Speed achieved depends on the Coding Scheme supported by  
the GSM Network.  
Formats  
JPEG, BMP, GIF (including animated), PNG, WBMP  
Sharing via  
Infrared, Bluetooth wireless technology, MMS  
message, e-mail, PC file transfer, Memory Stick  
HSCSD Maximum Data Rates (kbps)  
Video player  
9.6 kbps per time slot  
2 + 1 Rx 19.2  
Tx 9.6  
14.4 kbps per time slot  
28.8  
14.4  
File Format .MP4 (MPEG4), 3GP  
Music player  
Phone  
File Format .MP3, WAV, AU, AMR and G-MIDI level 1 with  
24 voices polyphony, RMF, iMelody  
Personal ring Sound clips as personal ring tones and default ring  
tones -  
tone:  
supported  
Formats  
MP3, AMR, AU, iMelody, MIDI, RMF (Beatnik)  
and WAV.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Technical data  
195  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Integrated browser  
Audio formats  
Video formats  
AMR, AU, iMelody, MIDI, WAV  
MP4  
Markup languages HTML 3.2 (excluding features not relevant to a  
small screen device)  
WML 1.3  
WBXML  
EMS  
Supported items  
Sounds, Melodies, Pictures, Animations  
xHTML Basic  
xHTML Mobile Profile  
cHTML  
E-Mail  
WAP version  
Scripting  
Style sheets  
Images  
2.0  
Incoming mail server support POP3, IMAP4  
Outgoing mail server support SMTP  
Compiled WML scripts  
WCSS  
Content coding  
Security  
MIME compliant  
WBMP, GIF (including animated), JPEG  
SMTP authentication, SSL encrypted  
IMAP4 and SMTP  
Security  
WTLS Class 1, 2, 3  
TLS/SSL  
Attachments  
Receiving and sending  
WIM  
WIM interface including SIM-WIM (SWIM)  
15 - 120kbyte user-configurable; 30kbyte default.  
Cache  
Document viewer  
SMS  
Pre-installed viewers Microsoft® Word  
Microsoft® Excel  
Bearer  
GSM and GPRS  
Microsoft® Powerpoint®  
Adobe® Acrobat® (PDF)  
Concatenated  
Up to 255 messages  
Supplied on CD-rom Support for additional file types can be  
installed from the Multimedia for P908 CD.  
MMS  
Note The pre-installed viewer for Microsoft Word documents  
cannot be used to view files in Rich Text format (.RTF) A  
separate viewer must be installed to view these files.  
Image formats  
GIF (including animated), JPG, BMP, WBMP,  
PNG  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
196  
Technical data  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Index  
A
- inserting 11  
- removing 11  
Calls  
Certificate manager 165  
Chess 85  
Accepted callers 57  
Accessories 23  
Add to contacts 56  
Alarm tones 146  
Alarms 120  
- answering 45, 48  
- conference 49  
- flip closed 43  
- flip open 46  
Bluetooth wireless technolo-  
gy 136, 153  
Chinese characters 33  
Chinese key mapping 33  
Chinese punctuation 39  
Chinese punctuations 33  
Conference calls 49  
Connecting  
- bluetooth share 139  
- headphone 138  
- pairing 137  
ALS  
- settings 60  
- passcodes 138  
- incoming 48  
- support 54  
Antenna 182  
AoC - Call meter settings 59  
Application shortcuts 144  
Applications  
Bookmarks 81  
Browser view 78  
Browsing the internet 77  
- international 43  
- making 43, 46  
- options 46, 48  
- preferences 55  
- rejecting 45, 48  
- restricting 58  
- retrying automatically  
44, 47  
- via Bluetooth wireless  
technology 136  
- via infrared port 136  
- via SyncStation 135  
Connection type 171  
Connectivity software 135  
Contacts 99  
C
Cable 154  
Calculator 117  
Calendar 107  
- flip closed 15  
- installing 132  
- overview 24  
- adding images 145  
- creating and managing  
contacts 102  
- creating entries 107  
- managing entries 108  
- preferences 109  
- sending and receiving  
entries 109  
- removing 134, 169  
Area information 163  
Attachments 94  
- speed dialing 47  
- two or more 49  
- voice control 55  
- to add a contact 101  
- to delete a contact 101  
Control panel 147  
Corporate phone services 54  
- set up 59  
Camera  
B
- recording video clips 61  
- settings 64  
- taking pictures 63  
Care instructions 182  
Cell information 163  
Background picture 144  
Backing up data 142  
Battery  
Calibrating 148  
Call costs 59  
Call list 50  
Call waiting 57  
Calling cards 58  
- charging 12  
- information 183  
D
Data backup 142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
197  
 
Data restore 143  
Data storage 30  
Date settings 118  
Demo application 24  
Device lock 40, 178  
Dial-Up Networking Wizard  
175  
Entering text  
- Chinese characters 33  
H
Introduction to P908 8  
IP security manager 165  
Handsfree 56  
Handwriting recognition 35  
- Chinese punctuation 33  
- chinese punctuation 39  
- flip closed 31  
J
I
Jog Dial 18  
Jotter 113  
Icons 20  
- flip open 34  
Image editor 67  
Image status 64  
tries 13  
Incoming calls 48  
Increasing ring 150  
Indicator light 178  
Indicators 20  
Infrared 136, 155  
Inserting symbols 34  
Installing applications 132  
International calls 43  
International settings 149  
Internet 77  
- creating and editing  
notes 113  
- drawing pictures 114  
- managing notes 114  
- sending and receiving  
notes 114  
- handwriting 35  
- latin characters 37  
- numeric characters 37,  
Dictionary 127  
- database 129  
- history record and  
bookmarks 128  
- wildcards 128  
Disk formatting 165  
Display 147, 148  
Disposing of the battery 184  
Diverting calls 57  
Documents  
F
Find 28  
First time start-up 13  
Flight mode 52  
Flip  
- virtual 17  
Flip closed 15  
Flip open 16  
K
Key functions 117  
Key lock 41  
Keyboard 34  
Keypad functions 19  
- viewing 122  
Drawing pictures 114  
Driving 182  
L
Languages 167  
Latin characters 37  
Local synchronization 140  
Locations 119  
Lock problems 178  
Locks 40  
Folders 27  
Folders in Messages 88  
Formatting disks 165  
DTMF 52  
- accounts 155  
- turning on 46  
- bookmarks 81  
- browser view 78  
- browsing 77  
- signing documents 81  
- user authentication re-  
quest 81  
E
G
Efficient use 182  
E-mail 87, 93, 160  
Emergency calls 44  
EMS 89  
Games 85  
- device 40  
- key lock 41  
- SIM card 40  
General functions 27  
Getting help 30  
GPRS 171, 176  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
198  
Index  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
M
Networks 154  
Notes 113  
- viewing 123  
Personalizing your P908 144  
Phone 43  
Phone book  
- importing entries 13  
Pictures 65  
S
Making a call 100  
Master reset 167  
Media buffer 72  
Medical Devices 183  
Memory Stick Duo 21  
- adapter 22  
SAR 182  
- creating and editing 113  
Screen areas 17  
Screen saver 144  
Secure tokens 167  
Security information 166  
Self timer - picture 63  
Self timer - video 62  
Send as 29  
Sending notes 114  
Service provider 171  
Services 24  
Settings 31  
Setup Wizard 13  
Shortcuts 169  
Silent mode 51  
SIM card 11  
SIM card lock 40  
SMS 87, 89, 162  
Solitaire 85  
- managing 114  
- sending and receiving  
114  
- formats 119  
Numeric characters 37, 39  
66  
- taking 63  
- viewing 65  
- formatting 165  
Messages 87  
- accounts 89, 160  
- attachments 94  
- e-mail 93  
- folders 88  
- MMS 90  
- multimedia messages  
90  
- SMS 89  
O
Off 13  
On 13  
Online services 126  
On-screen keyboard 34  
Operational modes 14  
Options menu 15  
Overview 10  
Owner card 105  
PIN 40  
PIN2 40  
Powerpoint presentations  
- viewing 123  
PUK 40  
R
- text messages 89  
Messaging accounts 160  
MMS 87, 162  
Mobile music 73  
Modem 174  
Multimedia for P908 131  
Multimedia messages 87, 90  
Music player 73  
Radio Frequency 182  
Recording sounds 115  
Remote synchronization 141  
Removing applications 134  
Restoring data 143  
Restricting calls 58  
Retry to call 44, 47  
Ring signals 145  
P
Sony Image Station 68  
Sound files  
P908 Locks 40  
P908 overview 10  
P908 package 9  
Package 9  
PC connectivity software  
135  
- loop 74  
- managing 74  
- playing 73  
Sound notification 146  
Sound recorder 115  
Sound recordings 115  
N
Ring volume 150  
PC Suite for P908 130  
PDF files  
Navigation 16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
199  
- sending and receiving  
116  
Themes 144  
Time 118  
- playing 69  
- saving 71  
- using as ring signals  
116  
Sounds and alerts 149  
Speakerphone 51  
Speed dial  
- alarms 120  
- sending and receiving  
71  
Video status 62  
Viewer 121  
- locations 119  
- number formats 119  
- settings 118  
- workdays 119  
Viewing  
- making a call 47  
- set-up 51  
Spreadsheets  
- viewing 122  
Standby view 15  
Start-up 13  
Storage manager 168, 180  
Storing data 30  
Streaming 71  
Time & date settings 165  
To input Chinese characters  
38  
Tone based services 52  
Touchscreen lock 42  
Transfer items with Send As  
29  
- documents 122  
- PDF files 123  
- spreadsheets 122  
Virtual flip 17  
Voice control 55  
Voice mail 58  
Volume  
Troubleshooting 178  
TTY settings 59  
Symbols 34  
TTY support 53  
- changing 46  
Synchronization  
- local 140  
Turning on and off 13  
W
U
Wallpaper 144  
WAP accounts 164  
Warranty 184  
WIM management 169  
- remote 141  
Uninstalling applications  
134, 169  
T
Tasks 110  
User greeting 151  
Technical data 194  
Telephony 43  
Text entry types 31  
Text input 149  
Text messages 89  
V
Z
Video 61, 69  
Video clips  
- downloading 72  
- managing 70  
Zooming 28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
200  
Index  

Sennheiser Telephone MM 60 iPhone User Manual
Shark Iron GI408Z 10 User Manual
Sharp Fax Machine FO 11 User Manual
Socket Mobile Network Card EmETX i602 User Manual
Sony Projector KP 41T35 User Manual
Sony Speaker SRS AX10 User Manual
Sony Stereo System CMT CPZ1DAB User Manual
Sony Webcam VPCF11 User Manual
Subaru Automobile WRX I User Manual
Sylvania Portable CD Player SCD360 User Manual